You are on page 1of 444

Xerox 2101

user guide

Copyright

2003 by Xerox Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrighted material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted, including without limitation, material generated from the software programs that are displayed on the screen such as styles, templates, icons, screen displays, looks, etc. Xerox, The Document Company, The stylized X, and all Xerox product names and product numbers mentioned in this publication are trademarks of XEROX CORPORATION. Other company brands and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies and are also acknowledged. Printed in the U.S.A.

Preface
Thank you for choosing the Xerox 2101. Written with the new user in mind, this manual aims to provide all the information necessary for effectively operating the copier and the server, as well as notes on safety precautions and maintenance tips. To get the most out of your copier, please read the manual carefully and completely before using the machine. Keep this manual handy as a quick reference should you encounter any difficulties when using the copier. The samples that are used in this manual include the procedures for easier understanding of the machine.

In this manual, safety instructions are preceded by the symbol . Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures. As a member of the International Energy Star Program, Xerox confirms this product satisfies the requirements for the international Energy Star Program program. The following web site contains a knowledge database where you can find information on the Xerox 2101. www.xerox.com/support After entering this web site, select Online Support Assistant, then chose the product family.

Features in Brief
The following is a list of the main features of this machine in brief. The illustrations in this manual are created as realistic as possible to help in making the explanation of the features easier to understand.

1-Sided/2-Sided Copying
You can copy 1- or 2-sided documents as 1- or 2sided copies.

Sorting Output
You can select to output multiple sets of copies by sets or page numbers.

Report

port

Report

Report
port Report

5.1 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying

5.4 Sorting Output

Enlarging/Reducing Image
You can set similar or different percentage for the length and width to change image size.

Z folding
You can output z-folded copies.

5.7 Z-Folding 5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

ii

Features in Brief

Stapling
You can staple and output copies.

Erasing Edges
You can erase shadows that might form on the sides or center portion of bound document image.

Report

5.5 Stapling 5.10 Erasing Edges

Punching Holes
You can punched and output copies.

Shifting Image
You can shift or specify image position for copying with white space.

Report

5.6 Punching Holes 5.11 Shifting Image

Making Sample Copies


When making multiple copies of a document, you can output a single copy in advance to confirm settings.

Specifying Document Size


You can set the document size when copying a non-standard document size or when copying a document using a scanning size that differs from the size of the document that is set.

Report

Question Answer

Question

5.8 Making Sample Copies

5.12 Specifying Document Size

iii

Features in Brief

Separating Facing Pages


You can make copies from a bound document onto separate sheets.

Adjusting Image Quality


You can prevent copying of images from reverse page and adjust contrast automatically.

5.13 Copying Facing Separate Sheets

Pages

onto

5.17 Adjusting Image Quality

Copying Mixed Sized Originals


You can scan documents of various sizes for copying without specifying sizes.

Adjusting Copy Density


You can adjust how light or dark the copies should be.

Report

Report

Report

5.18 Adjusting Copy Density 5.15 Copying Mixed Size Originals

Making Two Sided Copies from a


Bound Document
You can make two-sided copies from a bound document onto separate sheets of paper.
Report

Specifying Document Type


You can select preset option according to your document type to make faithful copies.

Blank Page

5.19 Specifying Document Type 5.16 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document

iv

Features in Brief

Adjusting Density Control


You can adjust color density of image in terms of low/medium/high density levels.

Inserting Separators
You can insert blank sheets of paper as separators between transparencies.

Report

5.20 Adjusting Density Control

5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators

Adjusting Sharpness
You can soften or sharpen image outline.

Specifying Face Up or Down


You can select whether copies should be output facing up or down.

Report

Report

5.21 Adjusting Sharpness 5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down

Multi Documents to One Copy


You can merge multiple documents to one copy.

Copying Repeatedly
You can make multiple copies of a document on the same sheet.

5.22 Multiple-Documents Copying on One Copy 5.25 Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet

Features in Brief

Copying With Covers


You can add color or heavy weight paper as covers for copies.

Copying on Tab Paper


You can copy on tab paper

Report

Report

Report Report Report

5.29 Copying on Tab Paper 5.26 Copying With Covers

Creating a Booklet
You can create booklets from one or two-sided document.

Outputting Bi-Folded or Tri-Folded


paper
You can make copies to be folded in half or in thirds.

R ep

or t

R ep

ort

5.27 Creating a Booklet

5.30 Outputting Bi-Folded or Tri-Folded Copies

Printing Annotations
You can output copies with stamps, dates, page numbers, and copy management.

Copying on Postcards
You can copy on postcards using tray 5 (bypass).

Report
Urgent

Report

Report

Report

5.28 Copying with Stamp or Date

4.3 Copying on Postcards

vi

Features in Brief

Documents With Different Settings


You can scan documents of different copying settings by batches and then output the copies together.

Saving Scanned Data


You can save scanned data with copying settings on the hard disk as a copy file. By connecting to a network, you can also share documents scanned by another machine and print the data from several machines.
Scan

r po Re

First setting
Save
Report

Print

Next setting
Report

Third setting

Hard disk

5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

Chapter 6 Server

Scanning Documents
You can download files of scanned data from a client-side computer, transfer them by E-mail or to FTP server.
Scan

Save

Hard disk

Chapter 7 Scanning

vii

Contents
Preface..........................................................................................................................................................................i Features in Brief...........................................................................................................................................................ii Contents.................................................................................................................................................................... viii Using This Guide....................................................................................................................................................... xiii Conventions ...............................................................................................................................................................xv Safety Notes.............................................................................................................................................................. xvi The Objective of the International Energy Star Program ........................................................................................ xxiii Illegal Copies........................................................................................................................................................... xxiv

Chapter 1 Knowing Your Copier


1.1 1.2 Main Components and Their Functions ................................................................... 2 Switching On/Off Power ........................................................................................... 6 1.2.1 Switching On/Off Power............................................................................. 6 1.2.2 Saving Energy............................................................................................. 8 1.2.3 Auto Start ................................................................................................. 10 1.2.4 Breaker Switch.......................................................................................... 11 Using the Touch Panel Display .............................................................................. 12 1.3.1 Main Control Panel ................................................................................... 12 1.3.2 Touch Panel Display ................................................................................. 14 1.3.3 Copier Screen ........................................................................................... 16 1.3.4 Other Screens........................................................................................... 19 1.3.5 Operations on saved file ........................................................................... 20 Entering Password ................................................................................................. 21 Using the Foreign Interface Device22

1.3

1.4 1.5

Chapter 2 Loading Paper


2.1 2.2 Paper to Use .......................................................................................................... 24 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays ............................................ 27 2.2.1 Loading Paper in Trays 1, 2, 3, 4.............................................................. 27 2.2.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass) ............................................................ 30 2.2.3 Loading Paper in Tray 6 (HCF)................................................................. 33 2.2.4 Loading Paper in Tray 7............................................................................ 35 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings ........................................................... 37

2.3

Chapter 3 Loading Documents


3.1 Types of Documents .............................................................................................. 44 3.1.1 Document Sizes........................................................................................ 44 3.1.2 Automatic Document Size Sensing........................................................... 44 3.1.3 Special Documents to Note ...................................................................... 45 Loading Documents ............................................................................................... 46 3.2.1 Loading on Document Glass..................................................................... 46 3.2.2 Loading in DADF....................................................................................... 48 3.2.3 Original Orientation ................................................................................... 49

3.2

viii

Contents

3.2.4

Automatic Image Rotation......................................................................... 50

Chapter 4 Basic Copy Procedure


4.1 Basic Copying Procedures..................................................................................... 52 4.1.1 Making Copies .......................................................................................... 52 4.1.2 Checking Settings ..................................................................................... 57 4.1.3 Programming Ahead ................................................................................. 60 4.1.4 Checking Job Status ................................................................................. 62 4.1.5 Priority Printing.......................................................................................... 64 Interrupting Copying............................................................................................... 65 Copying on Postcards ............................................................................................ 67 Copying on Transparency ...................................................................................... 69 Copying on Heavy Weight...................................................................................... 72 Removing Copies from the Tri-Fold Output Tray ................................................... 73 Removing Copies from the Booklet Output Tray.................................................... 74

4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7

Chapter 5 Making Copies


Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9

1-Sided/2-Sided Copying ....................................................................................... 78 5.1.1 1-Sided Copying ....................................................................................... 78 5.1.2 2-Sided Copying ....................................................................................... 80 Enlarging/Reducing Image..................................................................................... 84 5.2.1 Same % for Length and Width .................................................................. 84 5.2.2 Different % for Length and Width.............................................................. 89 Selecting Paper Tray.............................................................................................. 92 5.3.1 Automatically Selecting Paper Tray .......................................................... 92 5.3.2 Manually Selecting Paper Tray ................................................................. 93 Sorting Output ........................................................................................................ 97 Stapling .................................................................................................................. 99 Punching Holes .................................................................................................... 102 Z-Folding .............................................................................................................. 105 Making Sample Copies ........................................................................................ 108 Loading Documents in Batches ........................................................................... 110
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 5.14 5.15 5.16

Erasing Edges...................................................................................................... 112 Shifting Image ...................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Document Size ................................................................................... 119 Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets ..................................................... 122 Specifying Image Orientation ............................................................................... 124 Copying Mixed Size Originals .............................................................................. 126 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document........................................... 129
Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Basic Features

5.17 Adjusting Image Quality ....................................................................................... 131 5.18 Adjusting Copy Density ........................................................................................ 133 5.19 Specifying Document Type .................................................................................. 134

ix

Contents

5.20 Adjusting Density Control..................................................................................... 137 5.21 Adjusting Sharpness ............................................................................................ 139
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.22 5.23 5.24 5.25 5.26 5.27 5.28 5.29 5.30

Multiple-Documents Copying on One Copy ......................................................... 141 Inserting Transparency Separators...................................................................... 145 Outputting Face Up/Down.................................................................................... 149 Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet........................................................... 152 Copying With Covers ........................................................................................... 155 Creating a Booklet................................................................................................ 161 Copying with Stamp or Date ................................................................................ 167 Copying on Tab Paper ......................................................................................... 171 Outputting Bi-Folded or Tri-Folded Copies .......................................................... 174
Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Basic Features

5.31 Job Template Settings for Copying ...................................................................... 177 5.31.1 Storing Job Templates ............................................................................ 177 5.31.2 Entering the Job Name ........................................................................... 179 5.31.3 Deleting Job Templates .......................................................................... 180 5.31.4 Recalling Job Templates......................................................................... 181 5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job) .......................................... 182

Chapter 6 Server
6.1 6.2 About Server ........................................................................................................ 190 Setting Folders ..................................................................................................... 192 6.2.1 Roles of the Folders................................................................................ 192 6.2.2 Setting Storage Folders .......................................................................... 194 6.2.3 Setting Shared Folder ............................................................................. 198 6.2.4 Setting Link Folder/FTP Folder ............................................................... 202 6.2.5 Setting Folder Name ............................................................................... 205 Saving Data.......................................................................................................... 207 6.3.1 Saving Data ............................................................................................ 208 6.3.2 Checking saved file................................................................................. 211 Editing Files.......................................................................................................... 214 6.4.1 Changing File Name ............................................................................... 214 6.4.2 Deleting Files .......................................................................................... 216 6.4.3 Merging Files .......................................................................................... 218 6.4.4 Deleting Pages/Inserting File .................................................................. 223 Copying and Moving Files.................................................................................... 227 6.5.1 Copying or Moving Files to a Folder ....................................................... 227 Printing Files ........................................................................................................ 232

6.3 6.4

6.5 6.6

Chapter 7 Scanning
7.1 7.2 About Scanning.................................................................................................... 238 Mailbox Settings................................................................................................... 239 7.2.1 Assigning a Password to the Mailbox ..................................................... 239 7.2.2 Setting the Mailbox Name....................................................................... 242 7.2.3 Displaying the File Name Entry Screen .................................................. 244 7.2.4 Setting a Mailbox as the SMB Shared Folder ......................................... 247

Contents

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.2.5 Sending Scanned Files Automatically..................................................... 250 Scanning Documents ........................................................................................... 263 7.3.1 Scanning Documents.............................................................................. 264 7.3.2 Checking Saved Files ............................................................................. 269 7.3.3 Changing File Name ............................................................................... 271 7.3.4 Deleting Files .......................................................................................... 274 Installing the Scanner Driver ................................................................................ 276 7.4.1 About the Operating Environment........................................................... 276 7.4.2 Installing the Scanner Driver................................................................... 277 7.4.3 Uninstalling the Scanner Driver .............................................................. 280 Downloading Scanned Data................................................................................. 281 7.5.1 Downloading files with a Web browser ................................................... 282 7.5.2 Downloading files Using FTP.................................................................. 283 7.5.3 Accessing SMB Shared Folder ............................................................... 284

Chapter 8 System Administrator Mode Settings


8.1 System Administrator Mode ................................................................................. 286 8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode.......................................................... 286 8.1.2 Entering/Exiting Tools Mode ................................................................... 289 8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode .............................................................. 292 Overview of Tools Mode ...................................................................................... 294 Setting Tools Mode .............................................................................................. 304 8.3.1 Changing Tools Mode Settings............................................................... 304 8.3.2 Changing Tools Password ...................................................................... 306 Overview of Auditron Mode.................................................................................. 308 Auditron Menu...................................................................................................... 310 8.5.1 Review Accounts .................................................................................... 310 8.5.2 Create/Modify Accounts.......................................................................... 311 8.5.3 Reset Account Data ................................................................................ 314 8.5.4 Auditron Setup ........................................................................................ 315 8.5.5 Change of Password............................................................................... 317 Checking Network Settings .................................................................................. 319

8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5

8.6

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 322 9.1.1 Dealing With Error Messages ................................................................. 322 9.1.2 Dealing With Server Faults ..................................................................... 322 9.1.3 Dealing With Other Troubles................................................................... 323 Clearing Paper Jams............................................................................................ 326 9.2.1 Trays 1 - 4............................................................................................... 327 9.2.2 Tray 5 (Bypass)....................................................................................... 328 9.2.3 HCF......................................................................................................... 330 9.2.4 Tray 7...................................................................................................... 336 9.2.5 Lower Left Area....................................................................................... 337 9.2.6 Inside Copier........................................................................................... 339 9.2.7 Inside Finisher Left Door......................................................................... 342 9.2.8 Inside Finisher Right Door ...................................................................... 346 9.2.9 Folding Unit (Z and C)............................................................................. 351 9.2.10 Output Area of Finisher........................................................................... 358 Clearing Document Jams..................................................................................... 361 Solving Stapling Problems ................................................................................... 365

9.2

9.3 9.4

xi

Contents

9.5

Solving Curled Output .......................................................................................... 369

Chapter 10 Daily Care


10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 Cleaning Copier ................................................................................................... 372 Consumables ....................................................................................................... 373 Replacing Toner Cartridge ................................................................................... 376 Replacing Waste Toner Bottle A .......................................................................... 379 Replacing Staple Cartridge .................................................................................. 381 Emptying Punch Scrap Container ........................................................................ 385 Checking Meter .................................................................................................... 387 10.7.1 Checking sum of copies made................................................................ 387 10.7.2 Checking the Total Number of Copies for Each Department.................. 388

Appendix
A Specifications ....................................................................................................... 392 B Possible Combinations of Features ..................................................................... 398 C Originals/Copies Orientation (With Covers) ......................................................... 404 D Originals/Copies Orientation (With Drilled Paper)................................................ 407 Index ....................................................................................................................................................................... 409

xii

Using This Guide


This product is designated as 2101 in all markets except for those served by Fuji Xerox (FX) and FX Asian Pacific (FXAP). In FX and FXAP, the product designation is 1015S. The organization of this manual is as follows. When an optional product is installed, the display of the features and machine might be different.

Chapter 1 Knowing Your Copier


Contains information that you should know before using the machine, like the name of each part of the machine, how to switch on/off the power and how to use the touch panel display. Read this chapter immediately after the machine has been installed.

Chapter 2 Loading Paper


Explains the types of paper you can use, as well as how to handle and change/replenish them. Read this chapter when loading paper.

Chapter 3 Loading Documents


Explains the types of documents you can use for copying, as well as how to handle and load them. Read this chapter when loading documents.

Chapter 4 Basic Copy Procedure


Explains the basic knowledge of making copies; copying onto postcard, transparency, heavy weight paper; and interrupt copying.

Chapter 5 Making Copies


Explains the common copying procedures, involving the features of Basic Features, Added Features, and Image Quality tabs. Read this chapter when making copies.

Chapter 6 Server
Explains how to save the document data as a copy file and how to merge/edit saved copy files. Read this chapter when using the server.

Chapter 7 Scanning
Explains how to scan the document and save the data to the server. Read this chapter when scanning documents.

Chapter 8 System Administrator Mode Settings


Explains about the factory settings and default values of the various features so that you could customize the machine according to your needs, making it easier to use. Read this chapter when customizing your machine. This machine is equipped with the feature to control the number of copies made by users. Read this chapter also when you are controlling or calculating the number of copies made.

xiii

Using This Guide

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
Explains how to deal with paper/document jams and error messages. Read this chapter when you encounter problems with your machine.

Chapter 10 Daily Care


Explains how to carry out maintenance of your machine, like cleaning, replacing consumables like toner cartridge and checking meters. Read this chapter when necessary.

Appendix
Explains about the specifications of the machine, possible combinations of features, the documents/copies orientation when copying with covers, and the orientation of documents and paper when copying on punched paper.

xiv

Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:

When an optional product is needed

Touch panel display before a procedure

Select buttons on touch panel display

Buttons/features on touch panel display

Buttons on control panel

Additional information about operations and features. Points to pay attention to. Indicates reference sources.

xv

Safety Notes
Read these safety notes carefully before using this product to ensure you operate the machine safely.
This section explains the safety symbols used throughout the manual

is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, can result in severe injury or loss of life. is used to alert operators to an operating procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, might result in safety hazards to personnel or damage to the equipment. This symbol is used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that requires close attention. Read and follow instructions carefully to insure the task is accomplished safely. This symbol is used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed. Read and follow instructions carefully. This symbol is used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that should be emphasized for operating safety. Read and follow instructions carefully.

Heated Surface

Flammable

Electric Shock

Pinched fingers

Prohibit

No Fire

Do not tear down

Do not touch

Instructions Unplug

Ground/Earth

Precautions for Installation and Relocation


The machine has ventilation holes on its bottom. A poorly ventilated machine can cause excessive internal heat and fire. The accompanying diagrams show the minimum clearances required for normal operation, consumables replacement, and maintenance to ensure your machine operates at peak performance. Your representative will provide necessary support for the proper installation of the machine.

Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty, or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks. Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that may catch fire. Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand the machine weight of 421 kg (when installing all optional products). If tilted, the machine may fall over and cause injuries. When relocating the machine, contact your Customer Support Center.

xvi

Safety Notes

With staple finisher (optional)

When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the power cord connected, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shocks. When moving the machine, do not tilt it more than 10 degrees. If tilted excessively, the machine may fall over and cause injuries.

With booklet maker finisher (optional) Front Front Back Back

Left Right

Right Left

With staple finisher (optional), folding unit (optional), and HCF (optional)

When the machine is installed, be sure to lock the caster stoppers. An unlocked machine may fall over or slide and cause injuries.

With booklet maker finisher (optional), folding unit (optional), and HCF (optional)

The machine is capable of operating normally within the following recommended environmental limits: Temperature range: 10-32C; Humidity range: 30-80% (no condensation). Humidity should be 61% or below at 32C, and temperature should be 29C or below at 80% humidity.

xvii

Safety Notes

Sudden temperature fluctuations can affect copy quality. Rapid heating of a cold room can cause condensation inside the machine, directly interfering with image transfer.

Do not expose the machine to direct sunlight. Exposure to direct sunlight can adversely affect the machine's performance.

Electrical Safety
The 2101 copier/printer and the recommended maintenance supplies have been designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. Attention to the following notes will ensure the continued safe operation of your copier/ printer.

Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings on this equipment. Making a contact with a voltage point or shorting out a part could result in fire or electrical shock.

Use only the power cord supplied with this equipment. Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord. If you do not know whether or not an outlet is grounded, consult a qualified electrician. Do not use a ground adapter plug to connect this equipment to an electrical outlet that lacks a ground connection terminal.

If any of the following conditions occur, switch off the power to the machine immediately and disconnect the power cord from the electrical outlet. Call an authorized Xerox service representative to correct the problem. The machine emits unusual noises or odors. The power cord is damaged or frayed. A wall panel circuit breaker, fuse, or other safety device has been tripped. Liquid is spilled into the copier/printer. The machine is exposed to water. Any part of the machine is damaged.

This machine is to be used on a 208-240V 15A branch circuit. If this machine needs to be moved to a different location, contact a Xerox service representative. You may get a severe electrical shock if the outlet is not correctly grounded.

Disconnect Device The power cable is the disconnect device for this equipment. It is attached to the back of the machine as a plug-in device. To remove all electrical power from the machine, disconnect the power cable from the electrical outlet.

Do not place the copier/printer where people may step on or trip on the power cord. Do not place objects on the power cord. Do not override or disable electrical or mechanical interlocks. Do not obstruct the ventilation openings. These openings are provided to prevent overheating of the machine.

xviii

Safety Notes

Laser Safety
safety standards. With specific regard to laser safety, the equipment complies with performance standards for laser products set by government, national, and international agencies as a Class 1 laser product. It does not emit hazardous light, as the beam is totally enclosed during all phases of customer operation and maintenance.

Use of controls, adjustments, or procedures other than those specified in this documentation may result in a hazardous exposure to laser radiation. This equipment complies with international

Maintenance Safety
Do not attempt any maintenance procedure that is not specifically described in the documentation that is supplied with your copier/printer. Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not approved may cause poor performance of the copier/printer, and could create a dangerous condition. Use the supplies and cleaning materials only as directed in this manual. Keep all of these materials out of the reach of children. Do not remove the covers or guards that are fastened with screws. There are no parts behind these covers that you can maintain or service. Do not perform any maintenance procedures unless you have been trained to do them by a Xerox representative or unless a procedure is specifically described in one of the copier/ printer manuals.

Operational Safety
Your Xerox equipment and supplies were designed and tested to meet strict safety requirements. These include safety agency examination, approval, and compliance with established environmental standards. Your attention to the following safety guidelines will help ensure the continued safe operation of your copier/printer: Use the materials and supplies specifically designed for your copier/printer. The use of unsuitable materials may result in poor performance of the machine and possibly a hazardous situation. Follow all warnings and instructions that are marked on or supplied with the machine. Place the machine in a room that provides adequate space for ventilation and servicing. Place the machine on a level, solid surface (not on a thick pile carpet) that has adequate strength to support the weight of the machine. Do not attempt to move the machine. A leveling device that was lowered when your machine was installed may damage the carpet or floor. Do not locate the machine near a heat source. Do not locate the machine in direct sunlight. Do not locate the machine in line with the cold air flow from an air conditioning system. Do not place containers of coffee or other liquid on the machine. Do not block or cover the slots and openings on the machine. Without adequate ventilation, the machine may overheat. Do not attempt to override any electrical or mechanical interlock devices.

xix

Safety Notes

very hot and could cause personal injury. If you need any additional safety information concerning the machine or materials, contact your Xerox representative.

Be careful when working in areas identified with this warning symbol. These areas may be

Ozone Safety
This product produces ozone during normal operation. The ozone is heavier than air, and the quantity is dependent on copy volume. Providing the correct environmental parameters, as specified in the Xerox installation procedures, ensures that concentration levels meet safe limits. If you need additional information about ozone, request the Xerox publication, OZONE, 600P83222, by calling 1-800-8286571 in the USA. For a French language version, call 1-800- 828-6571 in the USA, then press 2.

Radio Frequency Emissions


FCC
The following applies to the product when equipped with the Token Ring or Banyan Vines connectivity options: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his/her own expense. Changes or modifications to this equipment not specifically approved by the Xerox Corporation may void the users authority to operate this equipment. Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations.

In Canada
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as defined in the Radio interference regulations of Industry Canada.

Extra Low Voltage Approval


The 2101 copier/printer is in compliance with various governmental agencies and national safety regulations. All system ports meet the Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) circuits for connection to customer-owned devices and networks. Additions of customer-owned or third party accessories that are attached to the copier/ printer must meet or exceed the requirements listed above. All modules that require external connection must be installed per the 2101 installation procedure.

xx

Safety Notes

Locations of warning and caution labels


To ensure your safety in operating the copier, please read the warning and caution labels pasted on the internal parts of the machine carefully.

Label

Label

Label

Label

Label Label Label

xxi

Safety Notes

This page is intentionally blank.

xxii

The Objective of the International Energy Star Program


To protect the global environment and conserve energy resources, the International Energy Star Program encourages the following product features. Fuji Xerox confirms this product satisfies the requirements for this program.

Two-sided copying feature


This product has a two-sided copying feature to reduce the volume of copy paper used. This feature is set as the factory setting for this machine. For example, by copying two single-sided originals on both sides of a sheet of paper, you can reduce the number of paper used. Of course, you can also make single-sided copies. For details, see 5.1.2 2-Sided Copying.

Auto shut-off feature


This product has a power-saving feature, which turns the machine off automatically if it is on and not operated for a certain period of time. The factory setting of the auto shut-off time is set at 60 minutes. For details, see "Timeouts" of 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

Low power mode feature


This product has a power-saving feature, which switches the machine to a low power mode automatically if the machine is on and not operated for a certain period of time. In this mode the machine lowers the fuser temperature to save power consumption. The factory setting of the low power mode start time is set at 15 minutes. You can change this setting from 1 to 240 minutes. The recovery time from the low power mode is as follows: (applicable only if the machine recovers after one hour it has moved to low power mode) - for 220 V model: about 144 seconds; - for 240 V model: about 108 seconds. For details, see "Timeouts" of 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

xxiii

Illegal Copies
Congress, by statute, has forbidden the reproduction of the following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fine or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such reproductions.

1. Obligations or Securities of the United States Government, such as: Certificates of IndebtednessNational Bank Currency Coupons from Bonds Silver Certificates United States Bonds Federal Reserve Notes Certificates of Deposit Federal Reserve Bank Notes Gold Certificates Treasury Notes Fractional Notes Paper Money

Bonds and Obligations of certain agencies of the government, such as FHA, etc. Bonds. (U.S. Savings Bonds may be photographed only for publicity purposes in connection with the campaign for the sale of such bonds.) Internal Revenue Stamps. (If it is necessary to reproduce a legal document on which there is a canceled revenue stamp, this may be done provided the reproduction of the document is performed for lawful purposes.) Postage Stamps, canceled or uncanceled. (For philatelic purposes, Postage Stamps may be photographed, provided the reproduction is in black and white and is less than 75% or more than 150% of the linear dimensions of the original.) Postal Money Orders. Bills, Checks, or Drafts of money drawn by or upon authorized officers of the United States. Stamps and other representatives of value, of whatever denomination, which have been or may be issued under any Act of Congress.

xxiv

Illegal Copies

2. Adjusted Compensation Certificates for Veterans of the World Wars. 3. Obligations or Securities of any Foreign Government, Bank, or Corporation. 4. Copyrighted material, unless permission of the copyright owner has been obtained or the reproduction falls within the fair use or library reproduction rights provisions of the copyright law. Further information of these provisions may be obtained from the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington, D.C. 20559. Ask for Circular R21. 5. Certificates of Citizenship or Naturalization. (Foreign Naturalization Certificates may be photographed.) 6. Passports. (Foreign Passports may be photographed.) 7. Immigration Papers. 8. Draft Registration Cards. 9. Selective Service Induction Papers that bear any of the following Registrants information: Earnings or Income Court Record Dependency Status Previous military service

Physical or mental condition Exception: United States military discharge certificates may be photographed. 10. Badges, Identification Cards, Passes, or Insignia carried by military personnel, or by members of the various Federal Departments, such as FBI, Treasury, etc. (unless photograph is ordered by the head of such department or bureau.) Reproducing the following is also prohibited in certain states: Automobile Licenses - Drivers Licenses - Automobile Certificates of Title.
The above list is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your attorney.

xxv

Illegal Copies

Canada
Parliament, by statute, has forbidden the copying of the following subjects under certain circumstances. Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those guilty of making such copies. 1. Current bank notes or current paper money. 2. Obligations or securities of a government or bank. 3. Exchequer bill paper or revenue paper. 4. The public seal of Canada or of a province, or the seal of a public body or authority in Canada, or of a court of law. 5. Proclamations, orders, regulations or appointments, or notices thereof (with intent to falsely cause same to purport to have been printed by the Queens Printer for Canada, or the equivalent printer for a province). 6. Marks, brands, seals, wrappers or designs used by or on behalf of the Government of Canada or of a province, the government of a state other than Canada or a department, board, Commission or agency established by the Government of Canada or of a province or of a government of a state other than Canada. 7. Impressed or adhesive stamps used for the purpose of revenue by the Government of Canada or of a province or by the government of a state other than Canada. 8. Documents, registers or records kept by public officials charged with the duty of making or issuing certified copies thereof, where the copy falsely purports to be a certified copy thereof. 9. Copyrighted material or trademarks of any manner or kind without the consent of the copyright or trademark owner. The above list is provided for your convenience and assistance, but it is not all inclusive, and no liability is assumed for its completeness or accuracy. In case of doubt, consult your solicitor.

xxvi

Illegal Copies

This page is intentionally blank.

xxvii

Illegal Copies

xxviii

1 Knowing Your Copier


1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Main Components and Their Functions.............................2 Switching On/Off Power ......................................................6 Using the Touch Panel Display .........................................12 Entering Password.............................................................21 Using the Foreign Interface Device ..................................22

1.1

Main Components and Their Functions

Knowing Your Copier

This section explains the names and functions of every part of the copier.
The diagram below shows how the machine will look like when all the optional products are installed.

No. 1 2

Name Document cover Main control panel

Function To press down the document that is placed on the document glass. The Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is integrated into this cover. Contains operating buttons, indicator lights and the touch panel display. This control panel is used in most operations.
1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

3 4

Document glass Copier control panel

To place the document for copying. Lift up the cover to perform settings in the Tools and Auditron Administration Mode. To use the Tools and Auditron Administration Mode, switch operation from the main control panel to this copier control panel.
8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode

5 6 7 8

Front door Trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 Lower left cover Tray 5 (bypass)

Open to clear paper jams or to replace the drum/toner cartridge. To load the paper. Open to clear paper jams. To load non-standard size paper that cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 (e.g. special paper such as transparency and heavy weight paper) for copying on them. Server connected to the copier. Saves scanned document data. The scanned image data can then be downloaded to the client computer.

Server

1.1 Main Components and Their Functions

Knowing Your Copier

Back

Back

No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24,25

Name Power switch Document output tray Lower right cover Fuser unit Lever Drum cartridge (B) Transfer module Waste toner bottle (A) Toner cartridge Left cover Document guide Document check light Document input tray Breaker switch

Function Switches on/off the power of the machine. Receives documents that are scanned and output from the machine. Open to clear paper jams. Fuses toner to fix image on the paper. Do not touch as it is extremely hot. Lever for pulling out the transfer module. Includes devices such as the photoreceptor. Copies the image from the drum to the paper. Pull out to clear paper jams. Collects used toner. Contains toner. Open to clear document jams at the DADF. To align the edges of documents loaded into the DADF. Indicates that documents have been loaded properly. The part of the DADF to load documents. Automatically interrupts the power supply to the machine once electricity leakage is detected.

1.1 Main Components and Their Functions

Optional kit High Capacity Feeder (HCF)

Knowing Your Copier


Optional kit Booklet Maker Finisher and Folding Unit (Z and C)

1.1 Main Components and Their Functions

No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

Name Tray 6 (HCF) (optional) Top cover Top right cover Tray 7 De-curl button Output tray Finisher tray Booklet output tray Booklet output tray button Right door Staple cartridge for booklet Staple cartridge Punch scrap container Tri-Fold output tray Tri-Fold output tray button Left door Staple cartridge holder Load the paper.

Function

Knowing Your Copier

Open to clear paper jams in tray 6. Open to clear paper jams in tray 6. Shift tray 6 to the left to open. Load paper for covers or transparency separators. Paper loaded in tray 7 as cover/transparency separator will not be used for copying. Press this button to de-curl copied paper. Receives copies output from the machine. Receives stapled and punched copies. Copies are also output here when files are merged, or when Large Output, Collated, or Uncollated are selected. Receives copies when you select Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling. Press this button to deliver booklets to the removal position. Open to clear paper jams; replace staples or clear jammed staples; or replace the scraps from the puncher. There are two staple cartridge for booklet. Open to replace staples or remove jammed staples. Collects the scraps from the puncher. Open to throw away the scraps. Receives copies when you select Tri-Fold In or Tri-Fold Out. Press this button to open the tri-fold output tray. Open to clear paper jam. When you replace the staple cartridge installed to the optional staple cartridge, you can put the replaced one here.

Tri-Fold In and Tri-Fold Out are available only when the optional folding unit (Z and C) installed.

1.2

Switching On/Off Power

Knowing Your Copier

Switch on the power of the copier before you begin copying. The server will then start automatically. After the power is on, the machine will take about 7 minutes (for 100 V model) or 6 minutes (for 200 V, 220-240 V models) to warm up before you can start making copies. Switch off the power of the copier at the end of the day, or when it will not be used for a long time. You can make use of the Power Saver feature if the copier is to be left idle for a while. The Power Saver feature reduces the power consumption of the machine, thereby helping to conserve energy.
1.2.2 Saving Energy

1.2.1

Switching On/Off Power

Switching on power
Procedure

If you switch on the machine immediately after it has just been switched off, it will take more than five seconds to warm up. If you switch on the power, the copy server will activate automatically.

Turn the power switch to the | (On) position.


The server starts automatically once the power of the copier is switched on.

1.4 Entering Password

Enter the password (by department/user) by using the keypad and then select Enter.
Each input digit is represented by an asterisk.

The Password Entry screen will not be displayed if the Auditron Mode is not enabled. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the Clear button to clear, and then re-enter.

The message Please wait for X minute(s). (X refers to the numeric value) is displayed.

1.2 Switching On/Off Power

The message displayed changes to Ready to copy after X minutes.

Knowing Your Copier

The content of error messages and screen to be displayed may differ with the optional products installed.

Switching off power


Procedure

The fan in the machine will continue to operate for about one hour after you have switched off the power. Do not turn off the power switch of the server.

Check that all copying is completed. Then turn the power switch to the (Off) position.
The display on the screen disappears and the power is switched off. The server will shut down automatically once the power of the copier is switched off.

1.2 Switching On/Off Power

1.2.2

Saving Energy

Knowing Your Copier

This machine has a Power Saver feature that reduces the power consumption of the machine in two stages, namely, the Low Power Mode and Power Saver Off Mode: Low Power Mode
Power consumption 100 V mode 200 V mode 285 W or less 295 W or less Standby mode about 460 W about 440 W

The power to the control panel and fuser unit is reduced. The display disappears while the power saver indicator light is lit. If you need to make copies, press the Power Saver button. The indicator light will be off and the Power Saver mode canceled.

Power Saver Off Mode


Power consumption 100 V mode 200 V mode 10 W or less 14 W or less

The power switch is turned to the (Off) position and the power is switched off. If you need to make copies, turn the power switch to the | (On) position.

Entering the Power Saver Mode automatically


The machine automatically enters the Low Power Mode if it has been left idle after a fixed period of time. If the machine continues to be left unused, it will enter the Power Saver Off Mode and the power will be cut off.
The default time for the machine to enter the Low Power Mode and Power Saver Off mode are 15 minutes and 60 minutes respectively. This default time setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. If you do not want the machine to enter the Power Saver Mode automatically, you can choose to disable this feature. For details, refer to Chapter 8 System Administrator Mode Settings.

1.2 Switching On/Off Power

Switching to the Power Saver Mode manually


You can also switch to Low Power Mode manually.

Knowing Your Copier

Procedure

1
Once the machine is in the Low Power Mode, it will enter the Power Saver Off Mode if the machine continues to be left idle for a fixed period of time. The power is then cut off from the machine. When you need to make copies, switch on the power of the machine.

Press Power Saver.


The machine enters the Low Power mode. When you need to make copies, press the Power Saver button.

Exiting the Power Saver Mode


You can exit the Low Power Mode by pressing the Power Saver button. The Power Saver Off Mode refers to the state when the power of the machine is switched to the (Off) position. To make copies, switch on the power of the machine.

1.2 Switching On/Off Power

1.2.3

Auto Start

Knowing Your Copier

While waiting for the machine to warm up after the power is switched on, you can press the Start button to program copying. This feature is called Auto Start.

Enabling Auto Start


To use the Auto Start feature, load the document, specify the desired settings and then press the Start button. The message Please wait ... The job will start automatically. will be displayed and copying will begin automatically once the machine has entered the Ready to Copy mode.
If you have set the machine ready tone in Tools Mode, you will hear the tone when the machine has warmed up and is ready to accept copy jobs. You can then proceed to set an Auto Start job after the tone. To set the machine ready tone or change its tone volume, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

Auto Start screen: When an A4 document is placed on the document glass and three sets are to be made with no change in size.

Canceling Auto Start


To cancel an Auto Start job, select Stop on the screen or press the Stop button on the control panel before the document is scanned. Then press the C button and the Auto Start job will be canceled.

10

1.2 Switching On/Off Power

1.2.4

Breaker Switch

Knowing Your Copier

There are two breaker switches on this machine. The breaker switch is usually at the positions shown in the diagram below. If the machine will not be used for a long time or when moving the machine, push the switch down or to the right. To switch it on, push it up; or to switch if off, push it down.

The power will be cut off automatically once the breaker switch detects a power leakage. Do not use the machine in such a case. Check that the power switch is turned off when you turn off the breaker switch. Safety Notes

11

1.3

Using the Touch Panel Display

Knowing Your Copier

This section explains the names and functions of every part of the main control panel and the messages that appear in the touch panel display.

1.3.1

Main Control Panel

This section explains the names and functions of every part of the main control panel.

* The * button cannot be selected.

Use the copier control panel to switch between the display of the Tools Mode and the Auditron Administration Mode. For details of the switching function, refer to 8.1 System Administrator Mode.

12

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

No. 1

Name Touch panel display

Function Displays the respective features and machine status. Touch this panel directly to select the features and instructions displayed.
1.3.2 Touch Panel Display

Knowing Your Copier

Job Status button

Press to check the presently processed job. On the Job Status screen, once a job is selected, you can pause it if it is being scanned or delete it if is paused. When printing multiple jobs, you can promote a print job over ones that are waiting to be printed. The promoted job is printed following the job that is currently being printed. For the system administrator to press to define the specifications of the copier features, or to check the meter reading or status of the consumables.
To use the Tools Mode and the Auditron Administration Mode, switch to the copier control panel for operation. For details of the switching, refer to 8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode.

System Settings/ Meter Check button

Power Saver button

Press to put the machine in the Power Saver mode if it is not to be used for a while to reduce power consumption. The Power Saver indicator light will be lit if it is in Power Saver mode. To return to the Ready (Copy) mode, press the button again. Press to display the Password Entry screen if the Auditron Mode is enabled. Use of the machine can be controlled by requiring each user to enter his password (by department/user). Press to check the copy settings. You can check the status of the settings displayed on the screen. In the Copy, Save to File, Copy and Save modes, you can check copy settings before pressing the Start button. You can also check the copy settings of a selected job from the list on the Job Status screen. In the Edit/Print Files mode, you can check the copy settings of the selected copy file when saved. Press to clear all settings and return to the default screen. The default screen is the screen that is displayed when the machine is switched on. Turn to set the volume of error tones to inform you of a completed copy job or a machine fault. Adjust by rolling the dial to the left or right.
You can also set the tone off. For details, refer to Setting Tone in 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

Password button

Review button

7 8

Clear All button Volume adjustment dial

9 10 11 12

Keypad C (Clear) button Start button Interrupt button/indicator

Use the keys on this keypad to enter numeric values, such as the number of sets to be copied. Press to delete or correct a wrong entry made by using the keypad. Press to start copying. Press to interrupt the current copy job for an urgent job. The indicator light on the left lights up when this button is pressed. Press again to cancel the interrupted copy job and return to the original copy job. Press to stop the current copy job.

13

Stop button

13

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

1.3.2

Touch Panel Display

Knowing Your Copier

The touch panel display is located at the left side of the control panel. It displays the messages and feature buttons required for performing a copy job. By touching the display with your fingers, you can make settings or select required screens. In the following section, the main screens will be used to explain the screen contents, as well as how to select the feature buttons. The touch panel display will be referred to as the display from now on. And the contents shown on the display will be referred to as the screen.
Switch mode buttons Memory

Paper Remaining

Switch Mode buttons


You can use these buttons to switch between the basic copying and server operation. Select Copy to make copies. Select Copy and Save to make copies and to save the scanned document data to the server. Select Save to File to save scanned document data to the server. Select Build Job to define build job settings. Select Edit/Print Files to change names of copy files and scan files saved to the server, merge copy files, duplicate/move copy files, change settings and print copy files. Select Scan to scan documents such as photographs as image data. Scanned document data is stored in a mailbox as scan files. Scan files stored in mailboxes can be downloaded onto client computers.
Chapter 6 Server Chapter 7 Scanning

14

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

Free Memory
Indicates the amount of remaining hard disk memory in a percentage that can be used for saving copied or scanned document data.
Free Memory doesnt mean the amount of remaining memory that can be used for scanning.

Knowing Your Copier

Paper Remaining
The number of horizontal lines increases and decreases accordingly to display the amount of paper remaining in the paper tray: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25% or No paper. During copying, a green indicator lights up on the left of the tray icon that is being used.
Tray 5 (bypass) has a horizontal line that indicates paper being loaded. Tray 6 (HCF) is optional. If it is not installed, the icon will not be displayed.

15

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

1.3.3

Copier Screen

Knowing Your Copier

There are four tabs for these screen displays: Basic Features, Added Features, Image Quality, Output Format and one button: Stored Job Templates. The respective screens of these tabs are called Basic Features screen, Added Features screen, Image Quality screen, Output Format screen or Stored Job Templates screen. Each screen contains the feature buttons.
<Basic Features Screen> <Added Features Screen>

<Image Quality Screen>

<Output Format Screen>

<Stored Job Templates Screen>

Unlike other screens, the frequently-used features on the Basic Features screen are represented by rectangular buttons for fast selections. Also, you can replace Original Type or Mixed Size Originals with another feature. For details, refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

16

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

Each feature is at factory setting. This default setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

Knowing Your Copier

Copier Screen
Message Area Tab Document Count

Number of copies Stored Job Templates button

Selection button

Message area
Displays messages like machine status and operation guide.

Tab
Select by touching the various tabs like Basic Features, Added Features, Image Quality, Output Format, and Others to display their corresponding screens.

Stored Job Templates button


Touch this button to display the Stored Job Templates screen.

Document count
Displays the number of documents being scanned.
The maximum number of originals that can be scanned is 1,000 (A4-sized) sheets. However, depending on the document size, error messages may appear on the display before the number of documents reaches 1,000 sheets.

No. of copies
Indicates the number of sets of copies to make. Enter a value by using the keypad. You can set a value between 1 to 9,999. To reset the value to 1, press the C button.

Selection buttons
Once touched, the button will be highlighted. ... indicates that there are more setting screens following.

17

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

Buttons in each screen


When a feature button is selected, the screen displaying the settings for that selected button will be shown. After selections are made on this screen, select the Save button to confirm the selections and exit that screen. Select the Cancel button to cancel any selections made halfway.

Knowing Your Copier

Feature buttons

Input Area

Selection buttons

Scroll buttons

Feature buttons
Touching a feature button displays its corresponding feature setting screen. Once the feature is set, a check mark ( ) will be added and the item set displayed.

Scroll buttons, input area


Touch , , , to scroll the display, or to select a numeric value or feature. For numeric value, touch the buttons continuously and the display will change rapidly. The range of the value is displayed within the parentheses ( ). The value that you have set is shown in the input area.

Invalid buttons
Features that cannot be selected together with some other features or buttons that are not within the range of the settings are displayed in light grey.

Cancel button
Select this button to cancel a selected setting or value, and to close the existing screen.

Save/Close button
Select this button to save a selected setting or value, and to close the existing screen.

18

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

1.3.4

Other Screens

Knowing Your Copier

Password Entry screen


When the Auditron Mode is enabled, the following screen will be displayed. Enter your password by using the keypad on the screen and the copier screen will be displayed.
1.4 Entering Password

Error message screen


When a job cannot be continued due to a fault with the machine like paper jam, or when a consumable has to be replaced, a message such as the following will be displayed. Follow the instructions shown on the screen to troubleshoot. Once the error is resolved, the copier screen will be displayed.

Power Saver screen


Once the machine enters the Power Saver Mode, the display disappears while the Power Saver indicator light remains lit. To return to the copier screen, press the Power Saver button.
1.2.2 Saving Energy Sometimes there is no display even though the power saver indicator light is not on. This is because the power may be switched off. Check the power switch.

19

1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display

1.3.5

Operations on saved file

Knowing Your Copier

You can do the following operations on a saved copy file:

Selecting/deselecting file
Select a file from the displayed list. Select the file again for deselection. Order displays numbers in the sequence of file selection. If a file in the middle of sequence is deselected, the succeeding file numbers are incremented one each.
You cannot select Copy/Move Files, Merge/Edit Files, Change File Name, Delete File(s) without specifying a file. In this manual, a screen that appears when the Hard Disk (Copy File) tab is selected is referred to as the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen.

Selecting all files


Select Select All/Deselect All to select all files. Select Select All/Deselect All again to deselect all files.

Switching between pages


Select Next to proceed to the next page or Prev to return to the previous page. Select First to display the first page or Last to display the last page.

Sorting files
Select Change File Order to sort files by names or times. A newly saved file will be displayed at the top.

20

1.4

Entering Password
Knowing Your Copier

If the Auditron Mode is enabled, you need to enter your password (by department/user) before you can start making copies. This section explains how to enter the password and to display the Password Entry screen. Approach your Auditron Administrator if you need a user password.
The Auditron Mode allows you to control the number of copies that each account (by department/user) can make. The setting and change of passwords are handled by the Auditron Administrator via the Auditron Administration Mode screen.

Procedure

When the copying is done, the display returns to the Password Entry screen. Unauthorized user with no password cannot make copies. If you have set a timeout period for the Password Entry Screen timeout, the display will return to the Password Entry screen even if you did not press the Password button. For details, refer to 8.5.4 Auditron Setup.

Press Password.
The Password Entry screen is displayed.

If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the Clear button to clear, and then re-enter.

2 3

Enter your password by using the keypad.


Each digit input is represented by an asterisk.

Select Enter on the screen.


The Copier screen appears once you have entered the correct password.

21

1.5

Using the Foreign Interface Device


Optional

Knowing Your Copier

The following screen will be displayed if a Foreign Interface Device (optional) is installed. Follow the instructions.

Please insert Xerox Charge Card. Please insert Xerox charge card.

If another type of copy control device is used, follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
When a copy control device is used, you cannot use the Auditron Administration features. For details on the Auditron Administration screen, refer to 8.4 Overview of Auditron Mode.

22

2 Loading Paper
2.1 2.2 2.3 Paper to Use .......................................................................24 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays......27 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings ....................37

2.1

Paper to Use

This chapter describes the types of paper that can be used on this machine. To obtain better image quality, it is suggested that you use the recommended paper. Contact your Customer Support Center if you are using a paper stock other than the one recommended here.

Loading Paper

Recommended paper
Xerox 4024DP 20lb (3R721)
Various types of paper/media may also be used besides the above recommended paper stock. Follow the instructions in this manual to load the paper stock in the appropriate tray, and select the paper size and paper type. Contact your Xerox Customer Support Center if you wish to use any other paper types.
Do not use transparencies and paper meant for ink jet printer as they can cause machine breakdown.

Paper stock that can be used


The types of paper stock that can be used are displayed in the following table. Tray 6 (HCF) and tray 7 are optional products. Paper size and capacity of paper tray
The paper sizes and number of sheets that can be loaded in each paper tray are as follows:
Tray Tray 1 Trays 2, 3, 4 Tray 5 (bypass): Paper sizes that can be loaded 8.511 portrait, A4 portrait B5 portrait, B5, A4 portrait, A4, B4, A3, 810" portrait, 8.511" portrait, 8.511", 8.513", 8.514", 1117", 8 K, 16 K portrait Non-standard size: Y direction: 5.8-11.69, 148-297 mm X direction: 7.8-17, 200-432 mm Standard size: Postcard, A5, B5, A4 portrait, A4, B4, A3, SRA3*1, 5.58.5", 810" portrait, 8.511" portrait, 8.511", 8.514", 1117", 1218"*2 B5 portrait*3, A4 portrait, 8.511" portrait B5, B5 portrait*4, A4, A4 portrait*5, 8.510" portrait*4, 8.511"*5, 8.511" portrait, 8.513"*6, 8.514"*6, B4, 16 K, 8 K, A3, 1117" Capacity (sheets) 500 sheets 550 sheets 130 sheets

Tray 6 (HCF) Tray 7 (Separators/ Cover Tray)

3600 sheets 150 sheets

*1 *2 To make copies on 1218" and SRA3 paper, adjust the paper guide first before you load the paper. SRA3 refers to the size, 320450 mm or 12.617.7". *3 When loading B5 portrait paper first, contact your Customer Support Center. *4 When changing B5 portrait to 810" paper, contact your Customer Support Center. *5 When changing A4 to 8.511" paper, contact your Customer Support Center. *6 When changing 8.514" to 8.513" paper, contact your Customer Support Center. Paper tray sizes that can be changed by the customer engineer are as follows. Contact your Customer Support Center. Tray 1 can be changed to either A4, A5, B5 portrait or 8.511" portrait. Trays 2, 3, 4 can be changed to 1218" or any non-standard sizes within the range of 182-297 mm (Y direction) and 182-432 mm (X direction).

24

2.1 Paper to Use

Paper stock that can be used


For each paper tray, use paper with the following paper weight, paper type and paper tray capacity:
Paper weight Paper tray GSM*1 Paper type Lbs. weight

Tray 1 Trays 2, 3, 4

64 - 105 g/m2 64 - 128 g/m2

18 - 28 lb. bond 18 - 32 lb. bond

Normal Normal

Loading Paper

Heavyweight1 *4 Tray 5 (bypass): 64 - 220 g/m2 18 lb. bond - 80 lb. cover Normal Heavyweight1 *4 Transparency *5 Label Tray 6 (Optional HCF) 56 - 128 g/m2 15 -32 lb. bond Normal Heavyweight1 *4 Tray 7 (Optional with finisher) 56 - 162 g/m2 15 lb. bond - 90 lb index Normal Heavyweight1 *4

*1 *2 *3 *4 *5 *6

GSM or g/m2 is a measure of the substance of paper expressed in grams per square meter, which does not depend on the number of sheets in the ream. Ream weight is the weight of a 7881,091 mm ream consisting of 1,000 sheets. Paper size of the paper classification mentioned here may differ in size depending on the brand. When you load heavy weight paper in the tray, set the paper type to Heavywt1 in the Tools Mode. The sizes of transparencies are only 8.511 and A4 portrait. Use only the recommended color tab paper. If not used, it may cause machine breakdown or paper jam. Paper jams may occur if you make copies on paper that are different in size and type from those selected on the display, or if you load the paper stock in the wrong tray. To make copies properly, select the correct paper size, paper type, and tray.

25

2.1 Paper to Use

Storing and handling paper


Take note of the following when storing paper:
Always store paper in a cabinet or at a place with low humidity. Damp paper may cause jams or affect the image quality. Always re-pack unused paper, preferably with desiccant. Always store paper on a flat horizontal surface to prevent bending or curling.

Take note of the following when loading paper:

Loading Paper

Do not combine and load paper left over from different reams into a tray. Do not use folded or wrinkled paper. Do not load mixed size paper into a tray. Always fan transparencies or labels before loading to prevent jamming or multi-sheet feeding. Do not use papers meant for ink jet printer as they can cause machine breakdown.

26

2.2

Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

This section explains how to load paper into and change the paper size of trays 1-4, tray 5 (bypass) and the optional tray (HCF) and 7. If paper runs out during copying, the following message will be displayed: Tray x is out of paper. Load xx paper into the tray. (where x refers to the tray number and xx the paper size). Add paper to the tray accordingly.

Loading Paper

The type of paper that can be loaded differs for each tray. For details, refer to 2.1 Paper to Use. Change the paper type setting if you need to change both the paper size and type.The paper type setting is changed by the administrator. For details, refer to 2.3 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings.

Always pull out a tray slowly. The tray may hit and hurt your knees if it is pulled out too quickly or with excessive force.

2.2.1

Loading Paper in Trays 1, 2, 3, 4

No change in size or orientation can be made for tray 1. The size is fixed at 8.5A11 or A4 portrait depending on your market area. You can change the paper size and orientation for trays 2, 3, 4, but you can only change the paper size to standard sizes for trays 2, 3, 4.
The paper sizes for loading in the paper trays can be changed by the customer engineer. The fixed paper size for tray 1 can be changed by the customer service engineer to A5, or B5 portrait; and for trays 2 4, 1218" or any non-standard sizes within the range of 182-297mm (Y direction) and 182-432mm (X direction). During copying, paper can be added to trays not in use.

Procedure

Pull the paper tray out right to the end.

Do not load different types of paper in the tray. This may result in paper jam. Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line.

Load the paper, aligning to the left side of the tray and with the side to be copied facing down.

Max

27

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

When changing the paper size:


You can change the paper size for trays 2, 3, 4.

(1)Remove any paper in the tray.

Loading Paper
Do not load different types of paper in the tray. This may result in paper jam. Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line.

(2)While gripping the paper guide lever A, shift it back until the end.

(3)While gripping the paper guide lever B, shift it to the right.

(4)Load the paper, aligning to the left side of the tray and with the side to be copied facing down.

(5)While gripping levers A and B, shift and align them with the edges of the paper.
You will hear a click sound if the guides are adjusted to their correct positions.

28

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

(6)Paste the paper size label on the tray.

After you have replenished the paper supply, you can press the Start button on the control panel to resume copying.

Loading Paper

Push the tray in slowly until the end.


Once the tray is correctly set, the message, Press Start button to continue. will be displayed.

Change the paper type setting if you need to change both the paper size and type. The paper type setting is done by the administrator. For details, refer to 2.3 Checking/ Changing Paper Supply Settings.

From Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen, check if the changed paper size for the paper tray is correctly displayed.
If the changed paper size is not displayed, repeat Step 5 and check that levers A and B are at the correct positions.

29

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

2.2.2

Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)

Load the following paper in tray 5 (bypass): transparency, postcard, heavy weight paper and other special and non-standard size paper that cannot be loaded in trays 1 - 4 and the optional tray 6 (HCF). When making copies onto SRA3 (320450mm/12.617.7") or 1218" paper, shift the paper guide on the bypass tray before copying. Always remember to shift the paper guide back to its Standard position after the copying is done.
For details on the type of paper that can be loaded in tray 5 (bypass), refer to 2.1 Paper to Use. 2-sided copying cannot be done with tray 5 (bypass). For details on loading the side for copying (face up/down) and paper orientation, refer to 5.26 Copying With Covers and Appendix C Originals/Copies Orientation (With Covers).

Loading Paper

Procedure

Open tray 5 (bypass).


If necessary, pull out the extension flap. The extension flap can be pulled out in two steps.

If the paper guide has been moved to the 12"/305 mm or 12.6"/320 mm position, shift it back to its Standard position.

Check the position of the paper guide, which is located as shown in the diagram on the right.
Usually, the paper guide should be at its standard position.

When loading paper:


Proceed to Step 3

When changing the paper size:


Do not shift the paper guide unless you are copying onto SRA3 (320450mm/12.617.7") or 1218" paper. Usually, the paper guide should be at its Standard position.

(1)Loosen the screw on the right of the paper guide.

30

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

(2)Lift the paper guide to shift its position.

Loading Paper

The Standard positions of the paper guide are as follows: 12"/305mm refers to 1218"; 12.6"/320mm refers to SRA3 (320450mm/12.617.7").

Standard

Standard

(3)Tighten the screw.

You cannot load mixed paper size in this tray.

Place the paper with the side to be copied facing up, and with the edges touching the sides of the tray and aligned with the paper guide.
Once you have loaded paper in tray 5 (bypass), the Tray 5 screen is displayed.

Adjust the guide for paper size gently to align it with the paper.

31

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

5
For details on selecting paper size, refer to 5.3 Selecting Paper Tray. Shift the paper guide if you are copying onto the following paper sizes: SRA3 (320450mm/12.617.7") of A/B Series Size; 1218" of Inch Size. For details on shifting the paper guide, refer to 2.2.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass).

Select A/B Series, Inch, or Non-standard as the paper size type, then select the paper size.

Loading Paper

6 7 8 9

Specify the paper type by selecting Paper Type. Specify settings for other features if necessary, and then start copying. After copying, shift the paper guide to the Standard position by following Steps 2 to 4. Move tray 5 (bypass) back to its original position after copying.
Remove any paper still remaining in tray 5 (bypass). If you have pulled out the extension flap, push it back to its original position and close the tray.

32

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

2.2.3

Loading Paper in Tray 6 (HCF)

The factory setting of the paper size is 8.511" or A4 portrait depending on your market area. You can change the paper size to B5 portrait, A4 portrait, or 8.511" portrait.
Tray 6 is optional. For details on the type of paper that can be loaded in tray 6 (HCF), refer to 2.1 Paper to Use.

Loading Paper

Procedure

Pull tray 6 (HCF) out right to the end.


The bottom plate is lowered automatically.

Do not load different types of paper in the tray. This may result in paper jam. Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line.

Load the paper, aligning to the right side of the tray and with the side to be copied facing up.

When changing the paper size:


Before changing the factory setting of the paper size to B5 portrait, contact your Customer Support Center.

(1)Remove any paper in the tray.

(2)Loosen the screw to remove the paper guide.

33

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

(3)Insert the guide into the slot of the desired paper size and tighten the screw.

Loading Paper

When B5 portrait has been changed to A4 portrait or 8.511" portrait, remove the horizontal guide and fix it on the right side of the tray with the screw.

(4)When the paper size is changed to B5 portrait, remove the horizontal guide on the right side of the tray by loosening the screw.

(5)Insert the guide to the B5 slot and then tighten the screw.

(6)Paste the appropriate paper size label on the tray.

The bottom plate is raised automatically and for up to 17 seconds, the following message will be displayed in the control panel: Add Paper.

Push in the tray slowly until it stops.


When pushing in the tray, do not touch the inner sides of the tray as your fingers might be pinched.

34

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

2.2.4

Loading Paper in Tray 7

The factory setting of the paper size is 8.511" or A4 portrait depending on your market area. You can change the paper size to B5 portrait, A4 portrait, or 8.511" portrait. Tray 7 is meant for loading paper to be used as separators when copying with transparency separators or covers.

Loading Paper

When adding paper to tray 7, remove any paper remaining in the tray, add it to the stack of paper to be added, then load all of the paper into the tray at once. For details on the type of paper can be loaded in tray 7, refer to 2.1 Paper to Use.

Procedure

Do not load different types of paper in the tray. This may result in paper jam. Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line.

Load the paper, aligning to the front side of the tray.

When changing the paper size: (1)Remove any from the tray. paper

(2)While gripping the paper guide, shift it back until the end.

35

2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Do not load different types of paper in the tray. This may result in paper jam. Do not load paper exceeding the maximum fill line.

(3)Load the paper, aligning to the front side of the tray.

Loading Paper

After copying, shift the paper guide to the default position.

While gripping the guides, shift and align them with the edges of the paper.

Loading tab paper


This section describes how to load the tab paper in tray 7. Paper loaded in tray 7 is sequentially fed from the top of the stack.

Procedure

If the paper is already printed on, load the paper with the printed side facing up and with the tab side to be fed first.

While gripping the guides, shift and align them with the edges of the paper.

36

2.3

Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings

The types of paper loaded in the respective trays are shown on the screen. The displayed information includes the paper size, orientation, and paper type. This section explains how to check and change the paper supply settings.
If you make copies on paper that is different from the displayed information, paper jam may occur. In order to make copies correctly, change the paper supply settings as well if you change the size or orientation of the paper for copying.

Loading Paper

Checking the paper supply settings


You can check the paper supply settings in Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen. Displayed information of the tray includes the paper tray number, as well as the paper size and orientation.
For tray 5 (bypass), you have to specify the paper type each time you load paper in it.

Tray number Paper size/orientation

Changing the paper supply settings


The information of the paper size and orientation for trays 2, 3, and 4 will be changed automatically once you load different papers in these trays. If a different paper type is used, you will need to ask your administrator to change the settings in Tools Mode. The following procedure will show you how to change the paper type.
2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

37

2.3 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings

Procedure

1
Loading Paper
You can also switch the screen by pressing Stop on the main control panel and 2 on the keypad at the same time.

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

Select System Administrator Mode.

A screen to confirm whether you want to switch control panel appears.

Select Switch.

38

2.3 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings

After a while, the following screen is displayed and operation is switched from the main control panel to the copier control panel.

Loading Paper

Lift the cover of the copier control panel.

For details on the Auditron Administration mode, refer to 8.5 Auditron Menu.

Select Tools Mode.

The Tools Password Entry screen is displayed.

39

2.3 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings

6
The factory setting of the Tools Password is 11111. If you do not have a password, check with your administrator. Each input digit is represented by an asterisk. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the C button to clear and then reenter.

Enter the tools password by using the keypad and then select Confirm.

Loading Paper

The Tools Menu screen is displayed.

Select Paper Tray Attributes.

The Paper Tray Attributes screen is displayed.

Select Paper Type/Paper Color.

The Paper Type screen is displayed.

40

2.3 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings

Use to select the tray which you want to change setting, and then select Change Settings.

Loading Paper

The screen of the selected tray is displayed. Here, we will illustrate by selecting Tray 2.

Disable the Auto Paper Supply / Auto Tray Switching setting of all the trays in Tools Mode if you want to set the Paper Type as Heavywt 1. For details, refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

10

Select the desired paper type.

11 12 13 14

Select Save when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the screen for setting the paper type.

Select Close when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the Paper Tray Attributes screen.

Select Close.
The display returns to the Menu screen.

Select Exit.
The default screen or the User Password Entry screen is displayed.

41

2.3 Checking/Changing Paper Supply Settings

15

Select Back on the screen displayed on the main control panel.

Loading Paper
Operation is switched from the copier control panel to the main control panel, and after a while, the Copy screen is displayed.

42

3 Loading Documents
3.1 3.2 Types of Documents ..........................................................44 Loading Documents...........................................................46

3.1

Types of Documents

You can load your document either on the document glass or in the optional Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF). The DADF allows multiple sheets of documents to be loaded and copied. This section explains the types of documents that can be placed on the document glass or loaded in the DADF.

3.1.1

Document Sizes
Document glass DADF Minimum: 148210 mm (A5, A5 portrait) Maximum: 297432 mm (A3, 1117")

Loading Documents

The sizes of documents that can be loaded on the document glass or in the DADF are as follows:

Document size

Minimum: 1010 mm Maximum: 297432 mm (A3, 1117")

Document weight (GSM *1) Maximum capacity (sheets)


*1

_ 1

38-128g/m2 (one-sided document) 50-110 g/m2 (two-sided document*2) 50 (FX P paper) 40 (heavy weight paper: 101-128 g/m2)

GSM or g/m2 is a measure of the substance of paper expressed in grammes per square meter, which does not depend on the number of sheets in the ream. The value when copying 2 to 2 sided or 2 to 1 sided.

*2

3.1.2

Automatic Document Size Sensing

This machine can automatically detect the document size for copying. You do not need to specify the size of your document if it is in one of the sizes listed below.
If you are making copies onto non-standard paper sizes, specify the document size by selecting Document Size Input from the Added Features screen. For details on entering document sizes, refer to 5.12 Specifying Document Size.

Document glass Document sizes that can be automatically sensed A6, B6, B6 portrait, A5, A5 portrait, 5.58.5", 5.58.5" portrait, B5, B5 portrait, A4, A4 portrait, 8.511", 8.511" portrait, 8.513", B4, 8 K, A3, 1117"

DADF A5, A5 portrait, B5, B5 portrait, A4, A4 portrait, 8.511", 8.511" portrait, 8.513", 8.514", B4, A3, 1117"

44

3.1 Types of Documents

3.1.3

Special Documents to Note

Document glass
When using the following types of documents for copying, automatic document size sensing might not work and image loss might occur. Resolve the problem accordingly. Non-standard size documents

Loading Documents

Specify the document size by selecting Original Size from the Added Features screen.

Highly transparent documents (e.g. transparencies)


Place a piece of white paper of the same size on the transparent document. Alternatively, specify the document size by selecting Original Size from the Added Features screen.

Glossy documents
Specify the document size by selecting Original Size from the Added Features screen.

Thick documents (e.g. books)


Specify the document size by selecting Original Size from the Added Features screen.
5.12 Specifying Document Size

Duplex automatic document feeder (DADF)


The following types of documents might be jammed or damaged if loaded in the DADF. Place them on the document glass:
Torn, wrinkled, punched, curled documents Clipped, stapled or glued documents Paste-up documents Folded documents Documents with coating or carbon on the reverse side

Highly transparent documents Glossy documents Heat-sensitive documents Heavy weight documents Light weight documents

45

3.2

Loading Documents

This section explains how to load your documents on the document glass or in the DADF.

3.2.1
Loading Documents

Loading on Document Glass

The following procedure explains how to load document on the document glass.
When using the document glass, options like 2 -> 2 Sided and 2 -> 1 Sided cannot be selected. If documents are placed one at a time on the document glass and the copies will be stapled, Doc.>50 must first be set to On. Refer to 5.9 Loading Documents in Batches for High Document Volume settings.

Procedure

Lift up cover.

the

document

Place a sheet of white paper on the document if it is a highly transparent material like transparency or tracing paper.

Place the document face down and align it with the upper left corner of the document glass.

46

3.2 Loading Documents

Lower cover.

the

document

copying a thick When document, do not use excessive force to press it against the document glass. The glass may break and injure you. When making copies with the document cover open, do not look directly at the copy lamp. It might tire or hurt your eyes.

Loading Documents

47

3.2 Loading Documents

3.2.2

Loading in DADF

The DADF allows you to load up to 50 sheets of documents from 148210 mm to 297432 mm. Scanning for copying will begin with the topmost sheet of document and the copies will be output facing down. This following procedure explains how to load your documents in the DADF.
Up to 40 sheets of heavy weight document (101 g/m2 to 128 g/m2) can be loaded. If Next Original is selected on the screen that is displayed while scanning a document loaded in the DADF, the document will be copied according to the initial feature settings. Up to 1,000 pages of an A4-sized document can be scanned. Depending on the size of the document, however, an error message may appear before 1,000 pages are scanned.

Loading Documents

Procedure

1 2
Pull out the extension tray if you are loading large documents.

Align the edges of the documents.


Remove any staples or clips.

Place the documents facing up in the DADF (side one facing up for 2sided copying), aligned to the upper left corner of the DADF, and as indicated by the arrow in the diagram.
The confirmation indicator lights up and the message, The DADF is selected appears on the message area of the copier control panel.

Take note of the following as they may result in document jams or damage your documents: Do not press the documents while they are being fed into the feeder. Do not allow documents that have been scanned for copying to overstack on the document output tray. Do not place any object on the document output tray.

Shift the document guide gently to touch the document edges.

48

3.2 Loading Documents

3.2.3

Original Orientation

This machine comes with the Margin Shift feature that allows you to adjust the position of the image by adjusting its top, bottom, left, right positions. The orientation of the document must be right in order for copying to be done correctly. The document orientation can be set by using the Original Orientation feature. The machine will then be able to determine the top, bottom, left, and right positions and move the image to the specified position to make copies.

Loading Documents

There are two types of document orientations: Head to Top and Head to Left. As Head to Top is usually the factory setting, load your documents in this orientation. For documents that cannot be loaded in the Head to Top orientation, change the Original Orientation on the Others screen to Head to Left and load the document in that orientation.
Head to Top setting
Top edge Head Left edge

Head to Left setting

Head

On the document glass Top edge

On the document glass

Left edge

In the DADF
5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

In the DADF

Features related to setting the original orientation are 2 to 1 Sided, Margin Shift, Mixed Size Originals, Multiple Up, Independent X-Y%. Take note of these when you set the original orientation. You can change the factory setting of the original orientation to Head to Left in Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode. Labels affixed on the document glass and DADF show the Head to Top setting. If the default value has been changed in Tools Mode, the display shown and the labels will differ.

49

3.2 Loading Documents

3.2.4

Automatic Image Rotation

The machine will automatically rotate the image of the document and make the correct copies even if the document and the paper tray are not in the same orientation.This feature is called Automatic Image Rotation. This feature will be effective if Auto% is selected for Reduce/Enlarge, or Auto for Paper Supply; and that a standard-sized document is copied onto a standard-sized paper of 8.5 x 11 or smaller.

Loading Documents

50

4 Basic Copy Procedure


4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 Basic Copying Procedures ...............................................52 Interrupting Copying..........................................................65 Copying on Postcards .......................................................67 Copying on Transparency .................................................69 Copying on Heavy Weight .................................................72 Removing Copies from the Tri-Fold Output Tray ............73 Removing Copies from the Booklet Output Tray ............74

4.1

Basic Copying Procedures

This section explains about the basic copying procedures of this machine. It also shows you how to check specified features and status of current jobs, as well as to store programmings for the next job. Before you begin copying, first check that you are in Copy or Copy and Save mode. The factory settings are as follows: 1 -> 1 Sided for 2 Sided, Auto for Output, 100% for Reduce/Enlarge, Auto for Paper Supply, and Text (Normal Text) for Original Type. If copying is done with the factory settings, the copies made will be on a paper size similar to the document and in 100%.
The factory settings can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

Basic Copy Procedure

If you make copies with the document cover open, do not look directly at the copy lamp. It might tire or hurt your eyes.

About output ejection timing In all of the following cases, copy outputs are ejected together after all pages are scanned:
Booklet Creation is selected. Face Up is selected at Output Orientation and also Collated. For Back Cover Only in Covers, options other than Blank Covers is selected at Printing Page. Build Job is selected. Mixed Size Originals is selected. When scanning documents from the document glass in High Document Volume mode, Auto for Paper Supply, Auto% for Reduce/Enlarge, or stapling/punching is specified. (7) End Page for Book Duplex is specified. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

4.1.1

Making Copies
Procedure

Chapter 3 Loading Documents

Load the documents.


On the document glass: Lift the document cover; place the document facing down; align the document with the top left corner of the document cover; and then close the cover. In the DADF: Load the documents facing up as shown in the illustration and then adjust the document guide to align the documents.

Enter your password if the message Please enter your password. is shown on the display. If you do not have a password, check with your administrator. For details on how to enter the password, refer to 1.4 Entering Password. Press Clear All to return to the default settings (when the power is on) if you wish to cancel the features that you have selected.

52

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image 5.3 Selecting Paper Tray

2 3

Check that Copy mode is selected.

Select a percentage from Reduce/Enlarge, and Select a paper tray from Paper Supply.
If you select Auto, a paper size matching the size of the document will be automatically selected.

When Auto% is selected for Reduce/Enlarge or Auto for Paper Supply, the document image will be rotated to fit the orientation of the paper loaded for copying. However, this is only applicable when a standard-sized document is being copied to a standard-sized paper of A4 or smaller. For non-standard paper sizes, the image cannot be automatically rotated.

Basic Copy Procedure

5.19 Specifying Document Type

Select your document type from Original Type on the Image Quality screen.

You can choose from seven levels of copy density to adjust the density of your output. The factory setting is Normal. For details, refer to 5.18 Adjusting Copy Density.

53

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

Select an option according to your document type.

Basic Copy Procedure

Press the C button on the control panel to clear any error when entering the number of sets to be copied. Once you have pressed the C button, the number of sets will return to 1. No other settings will be changed.

6 7

Select Save to specify settings for other features. Enter the copies by keypad. number of using the

The number of copies will be displayed at the top right corner of the screen.

To stop the scanning documents for copying, select Stop in the screen, and then press C(Clear). When the Clearing Paper screen is displayed, press Start to output the copies.

Press Start.
Copies will be made.

54

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

The number of copies can be changed on the screen that appears when a stack of documents has been scanned or when you select Stop. This does not apply when copies are to be ejected together after all pages are scanned. If Doc.>50 is On for the document placed on the document glass, you can continuously copy the subsequent documents with the previous settings. Refer to 5.9 Loading Documents in Batches for High Document Volume settings.

If you select Next Original while scanning documents loaded in the DADF, you can continuously copy the documents.

Basic Copy Procedure

The Stop button for stopping any ongoing copying Press the Stop button on the control panel to terminate a copy job that is in progress. Once you have pressed the Stop button, the copy job will be suspended and the following message will be displayed: Press Start to continue or C button to cancel. To resume the copy job, press the Start button again. To stop the job, press the C button. The Clear All button to cancel feature settings To clear all the settings of the selected features, press the Clear All button on the control panel. Once you have pressed the Clear All button, all settings will return to their default settings when the power of the machine is on. The Clear All button cannot be used when copying is in progress. The settings can automatically return to their default settings by setting a timer. Refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode. The C (Clear) button for correcting the number of sets for copying Press the C button on the control panel to clear any error when entering the number of sets to be copied. Once you have pressed the C button, the number of sets will return to 1. No other settings will be changed. The Stop button for changing the number of copies for any ongoing copying You can change the number of copies on the screen to be displayed when pressing the Stop button on the control panel (or Stop on the screen), except Collated is activated.

55

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

Automatic tray switching


This feature allows the machine to automatically switch to another paper tray with paper of the same size, orientation, and type to continue with the copy job, when paper in the specified tray runs out. This feature is called Automatic Tray Switching (ATS). This feature is enabled by the Tools Administrator in Tools Mode. All trays have this feature enabled as the factory setting. If all trays are loaded with paper of the same size, type (normal paper) and orientation, the trays will be switched in the order of trays 1, 2, 3, and 4.
The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode. When the optional HCF is equipped, the trays will then be switched in the order of tray 6 (HCF), trays 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Basic Copy Procedure

56

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

4.1.2

Checking Settings

You can check settings on the displayed Review screen. For copy files stored in the server, you can check the features specified when saved.

Checking settings
In the Copy, Save to File, Copy and Save modes, you can check the specified features before pressing the Start button.
For copy jobs, settings that are in the midst of being specified will also be reflected on the Review screen if it is displayed. Only settings related to the files being specified will be displayed when specifying Build Job settings.

Basic Copy Procedure

Procedure

You can also check the settings on the Job Status screen. For details, refer to 4.1.4 Checking Job Status.

1 2

Press Review control panel.

on

the

The Review screen is displayed.

The features that are not enabled are dimmed.

Select Close when all the settings have been checked.

The display returns to the Basic Features screen.

57

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

Checking settings of saved files


You can check the copy settings of the copy files saved in the server.
If the build job files and merged files are selected, all the settings for the entire file are displayed.

Procedure

1
You can also select the folder by entering the folder number from the keypad and then pressing Start on the control panel. The password screen is displayed if the folder password is enabled.

Select Select Folder to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen.
A list of copy files stored on the server is displayed.

From the list, select the folder with the files that you want to check and then press the Select Folder button.

Basic Copy Procedure

Select the copy file with the settings that you want to check and then press the Review button.

The Review screen is displayed.

58

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

This screen will display information like the file name and stored date of the copy file when saved into the server.

Basic Copy Procedure

Select Review on the screen.


The Review screen is displayed.

6 7

Select Close when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the Review screen.

Select Close.
The display returns to the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen.

59

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

4.1.3

Programming Ahead

Once the scanning of documents loaded on the DADF for copying has begun, you can start to specify settings for the next copy job before you load the next set of documents. Once the current set of documents is scanned, the next set of documents, if loaded, can be scanned immediately. Up to 10 jobs can be programmed ahead.
The Interrupt feature cannot be used with Program Ahead feature.

Procedure Basic Copy Procedure


When Program Ahead is selected, settings for the next copy can be made while documents are being scanned. Pressing Stop on the control panel will also stop the outputting of copies.

1 2 3

Load the first set of documents and specify settings for other features if necessary. Press Start.
Scanning of the documents for copying will begin.

Select Program Ahead when the documents are being scanned.


If On is selected for Doc.>50, Program Ahead can be selected only after End Job is selected and scanning documents is completed.

A message will appear to say that you can program ahead and the Basic Features screen appears. When saving files, a message will appear to say that you can save the programming.

60

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

4 5 6

Specify settings for any feature, if necessary.

When the first set of documents loaded has been scanned for copying, load the next set of documents, and press Start. Repeat steps to continue scanning of other documents.

61

Basic Copy Procedure

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

4.1.4

Checking Job Status

On the Job Status screen, you can check job status like whether the documents are being scanned for copying or a print job is being carried out. You can also pause or cancel jobs that are displayed on the list.
Where there are no ongoing jobs, the Job Status screen will not be displayed even if you select the Job Status button.

Pausing/resuming ongoing operations


To pause and resume ongoing operations.

Basic Copy Procedure


When you want to verify settings, select the job to be checked and press the Check Settings button. For details, refer to 4.1.2 Checking Settings. If multiple files stored in the folder are selected and to be reprinted, only one file is displayed. You cannot assign the files stored in the folder as the next job while you are copying the current job, or you cannot reserve the next job while reprinting the files stored in the folder. If Auto Print feature is enabled for the files stored in the folder, only the one file that is currently being printed is displayed. You can check which files are set to be printed through the shared folder. Refer to 6.2 Setting Folder for the shared folder.

Procedure

During a copying job, press the Job Status button.


You can check the job status on the Job Status screen displayed.

Select the job that you want to pause and then select Pause.
Copying or scanning of documents for copying will be paused. Once the job is paused, the message, Stop/User Action will be displayed under Job Status.

To resume paused jobs, select the job or jobs to be resumed (ones whose Job Status is Stop/User Action) and press Start.
Copy or scan operation is resumed from the point where the jobs status changed to Stop/User Action.

62

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

Deleting jobs
To delete paused jobs or to stop copying or scanning of documents.

Procedure

1
You can select Delete Job only when the job that has been paused is selected.

Select a job whose job status is Stop/User Action, and then press Delete Job.

Basic Copy Procedure

The job that has been paused will be deleted and copying will stop.

Select Close.
The display returns to the copy screen.

63

4.1 Basic Copying Procedures

4.1.5

Priority Printing

When there are multiple jobs waiting to be printed, you can give a particular job higher priority so that it is printed first. A job that is assigned higher print priority will be output immediately following the job that is currently being printed.
If priority printing is specified for two jobs, the one that is specified second will be printed before the job that was specified first. Priority printing is not available during sample copying.

Procedure Basic Copy Procedure

Press Job Status.


The Job displayed. Status screen is

Select the job to be promoted, then press Promote

The selected job is displayed following the job that is currently being printed.

Select Close.
The display returns to the copy screen.

64

4.2

Interrupting Copying

You can interrupt a current copy job to proceed with a more urgent job by pressing the Interrupt button. Once you press the Interrupt button, the current copy job will be paused as soon as it is possible. The interrupted copy job can be resumed once you exit the Interrupt mode.
You cannot press Interrupt to interrupt copying for a job that is programmed ahead or is a waiting job. For copying with Collated selected, once the scanning of documents for copying is done and End Job is selected, the machine will stop once all the scanned documents are copied. Interrupt copying cannot be done when in the Save to File, Build Job, Edit/Print File, and Scan modes, except for reprinting saved files. You cannot do Interrupt copying when using System Settings/Meter Check.

Basic Copy Procedure

Procedure

Press Interrupt.
The interrupt indicator lights up and the machine stops. If you press Interrupt when documents are being scanned for copying or when a copy job is being done, the machine will enter the interrupt mode with the indicator light blinking. Once the machine stops, the light is lit.

Up to 1,000 pages of A4-sized pages can be scanned for interrupt copying. Depending on the size of the document, however, an error message may appear before 1,000 pages have been scanned.

2 3

Load the document for the interrupt copy job, and specify settings for other features if necessary. Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
The documents will be scanned for copying and the copies output onto the output tray.

65

4.2 Interrupting Copying

After the interrupt copy job has been done, press Interrupt.
The interrupt indicator will be off and the machine will exit the Interrupt mode.

5 6

Remove documents that are loaded in the DADF for interrupt copying. Press Start.
The job interrupted in Step 1 resumes.

Basic Copy Procedure

66

4.3

Copying on Postcards

This section explains how to copy on postcards. For copying onto postcards, use tray 5 (bypass).
Usable postcards depend on the weight, size, and paper type. Contact your Customer Support Center for more information. Do not load the postcards into trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 and the optional trays 6 (HCF) and 7 as it may cause machine breakdown or paper jam.

Copying onto postcards


Loading postcards
Setting document Loading postcard Output copies

Basic Copy Procedure

Paper size guide Document glass Tray 5 (bypass) Output tray

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.


Align the head of the document against the left side of the document glass.

2.2.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)

Load the postcards in tray 5 (bypass).


Load the postcards with the side to be copied facing up and its head on the right side, and then gently push the guide to align the postcards. The Tray 5 (bypass) screen is displayed.

67

4.3 Copying on Postcards

When Postcard is selected for paper size, Heavywt 2 is automatically selected for Paper Type.

Select A/B Series Size or Postcard for paper size.

Basic Copy Procedure

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

68

4.4

Copying on Transparency

To copy on transparencies, load them in tray 5 (bypass) and then select the correct paper type for copying.
Do not load the transparencies into trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 and the optional trays 6 (HCF) and 7 as it may cause machine breakdown or paper jam. Use only the recommended transparencies. If not, it may cause machine breakdown or paper jam.

If you select Transp Separators on the Output Format screen, one sheet of blank paper will be inserted automatically after every transparency copied. To copy on transparency, you must load paper in the same orientation and of the same paper size as the document in trays 1, 2, 3, 4 or the optional trays 6 (HCF) and 7 beforehand.
The separators, output as blank paper, will not be used for copying and will not be counted by the meters. However, they will be counted if Printed Separators is selected on the Transparency Separators screen. 5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators

Basic Copy Procedure

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

Use transparencies meant for printing in black and white. Load OHP (V515) in portrait direction to prevent paper jam.

1 2

Load the documents.

Load transparencies tray 5 (bypass).

in

Adjust the guide gently to align the transparencies. The Tray 5 (bypass) screen is displayed.

Select A/B Series Size and A4 P for Paper Size and Transparency for Paper Type.

69

4.4 Copying on Transparency

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Load separators if needed. Proceed to Step 6 if no separator is required.


Load the separators in the same orientation and of the same paper size as the transparencies. Load the separators in trays 1-4 or the optional trays 6 (HCF) or 7.

Basic Copy Procedure


5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators

When loading separators: (1)Select Output Format and then Transp Separators.

The Transparency Separators screen is displayed.

(2)Select On and specify whether or not to copy on the separators.

70

4.4 Copying on Transparency

When On is selected for Transparency Separators, option buttons to specify whether to print on the separators and Paper Tray Settings are displayed on the right of the screen.

Basic Copy Procedure

Select Blank Separators to make copies with blank separators inserted. Select Printed Separators to make copies on both the transparencies and separators inserted.

(3)Select Paper Tray Settings.


The Paper Tray Settings screen is displayed.

(4)From Separators Tray, select the tray that you have loaded paper as separators in Step 5.

5 Making Copies

When copying on transparencies with separators, you can copy only one set at a time.

6 7

Select Save to specify settings for other features.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

71

4.5

Copying on Heavy Weight

To copy on special papers like heavy weight paper, load them in tray 5 (bypass) and then select the correct paper type for copying.
2.1 Paper to Use

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

2.2.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)

1 2

Load the documents.

Basic Copy Procedure

Place the paper with the side for copying facing up and then insert the paper to align with the paper guide.
Once you have loaded the paper properly, the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen will be displayed.

For details on selecting paper size, refer to Selecting tray 5 (bypass) in 5.3.2 Manually Selecting Paper Tray.

Select the paper size and type.


Here, we will illustrate with A4 and Heavywt 2 being selected.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

72

4.6

Removing Copies from the Tri-Fold Output Tray

This section explains how to remove the copies from the tri-fold output tray.
Keep the power on while you remove the copies from the tri-fold output tray. If you turn off the power and press the Tri-Fold Output Tray button, the tray will not open. When the tri-fold output tray is full, a message appears on the screen. Follow the instructions to remove the copies.

Procedure

When you pull out the tri-fold output tray, remove all the copies. If you leave copies in the tray, the next copy job may not be completed due to the previous copies left.

Basic Copy Procedure

Press Tray.

Tri-Fold

Output

The tri-fold output tray opens.

Pull out the tri-fold output tray and remove all the copies.

If the tri-fold output tray is not completely closed, a message appears on the screen and the machine does not start.

Slowly push back the trifold output tray.

73

4.7

Removing Copies from the Booklet Output Tray

This section explains how to remove the copies from the booklet output tray.
When the booklet output tray is full, a message appears on the screen. Follow the instructions to remove the copies. The copies delivered to the booklet output tray automatically move to the position for removal if the required setting has been made. Contact your Customer Support Center for details.

Procedure

Basic Copy Procedure

Press Booklet Output.


The paper transport belt for the booklet output tray moves the copies to the position for removal.

Remove all the copies.

74

4.7 Removing Copies from the Booklet Output Tray

Lowering the Flap of the Booklet Output Tray


If you lower the flap of the booklet output tray, the copies will drop from the tray. If you place a box under the tray, it will temporarily hold the copies and you can make a large volume of copies without removing the output each time the tray fills up.

Procedure

Pull the flap of the booklet output tray to the right.

Basic Copy Procedure

Lower the flap.

Raise the flap of the booklet output tray and push it back to the original position when necessary.

75

4.7 Removing Copies from the Booklet Output Tray

Basic Copy Procedure

76

5 Making Copies
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying [2 Sided]...................................78 Enlarging/Reducing Image [Reduce/Enlarge] .................84 Selecting Paper Tray [Paper Supply] ...............................92 Sorting Output [Output].....................................................97 Stapling [Output]................................................................99 Punching Holes [Output].................................................102 Z-Folding [Output/Finishing/Z Fold]...............................105 Making Sample Copies [Sample Set] .............................108 Loading Documents in Batches [High Document Volume]................................................. 110 5.10 Erasing Edges [Edge Erase] ........................................... 112 5.11 Shifting Image [Margin Shift] .......................................... 115 5.12 Specifying Document Size [Original Size] ..................... 119 5.13 Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets [Bound Originals].............................................................122 5.14 Specifying Image Orientation [Original Orientation] ....124 5.15 Copying Mixed Size Originals [Mixed Size Originals] ..126 5.16 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document [Book Duplex]...................................................................129 5.17 Adjusting Image Quality [Image Quality Presets] .........131 5.18 Adjusting Copy Density [Lighter/Darker].......................133 5.19 Specifying Document Type [Original Type] ...................134 5.20 Adjusting Density Control [Density Control].................137 5.21 Adjusting Sharpness [Sharpness] .................................139 5.22 Multiple-Documents Copying on One Copy [Multiple Up]..141 5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators [Transparency Separators]..............................................145 5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down [Output Orientation]............149 5.25 Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet [Repeat Image] .................................................................152 5.26 Copying With Covers [Covers] .......................................155 5.27 Creating a Booklet [Booklet Creation] ...........................161 5.28 Copying with Stamp or Date [Annotation] .....................167 5.29 Copying on Tab Paper [Tab Copying] ............................171 5.30 Outputting Bi-Folded or Tri-Folded Copies [Folding] ...174 5.31 Job Template Settings for Copying [Stored Job Templates]....................................................177 5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job) .182

5.1

1-Sided/2-Sided Copying
2 Sided

This feature allows you to make 2- or 1-sided copies from 1- or 2-sided documents.
The factory setting for this 2-Sided feature is 1 -> 1 Sided. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

5.1.1

1-Sided Copying

The following procedure explains how to make 1-sided copies from 1- or 2-sided documents:
1-sided document 2-sided document 1-sided copy

Report
Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Report

Report

1st page

2nd page

1st page

2nd page

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.


When making 1-sided copies from 2-sided documents, load the documents in the DADF.

From 2 Sided, select 1 -> 1 Sided or 2 -> 1 Sided. Select More to specify Originals or Original Orientation.

78

5.1 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying

When More is selected: (1)Select 1 -> 1 Sided or 2 -> 1 Sided.


When 2 -> 1 Sided is selected, specify in Originals, how the two sides of the 2-sided document are printed. Select Head to Head for documents with both sides printed in the same direction.

(2)When 2 -> 1 Sided is selected, specify Originals. When 1 -> 1 Sided is selected, proceed to Step (3).

1st page

2nd page

Select Head to Toe for documents with the two sides printed in opposite direction.

1st page

2nd page

Making Copies

(3)Check Original Orientation.


5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Confirm the documents are loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation.
Head to Top:
Head Head

Head to Left:

Head Head

Basic Features

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

(4)Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Added Features

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

79

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.1 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying

5.1.2

2-Sided Copying

The following procedure explains how to make 2-sided copies from 1- or 2-sided documents:
1-sided document 2-sided document 2-sided copy

Report

Report

Report

1st page

2nd page

Making 2-sided copies from 1-sided documents


To make 2-sided copies from 1-sided documents:

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

You cannot make 2-sided copies using tray 5 (bypass) or 12 18 paper.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

From 2 Sided, select 1 -> 2 Sided. Select More to specify Originals or Original Orientation.

80

5.1 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying

When 2 -> 1 Sided is selected, specify in Originals, how the two sides of the 2-sided document are printed. Select Head to Head for documents with both sides printed in the same direction.

When More is selected: (1)Select 1 -> 2 Sided. (2)Specify Copies.

1st page

2nd page

Select Head to Toe for documents with the two sides printed in opposite direction.

1st page

2nd page

Making Copies

(3)Check Original Orientation.


5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Confirm the documents are loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation.
Head to Top:
Head Head

Head to Left:

Head Head

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

(4)Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Basic Features

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

81

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.1 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying

Making 2-sided copies from 2-sided documents


To make 2-sided copies from 2-sided documents:

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.


When making 2-sided copies from 2-sided documents, load the documents in the DADF.

From 2 Sided, select 2 -> 2 Sided. Select More to specify Originals or Original Orientation.

Making Copies
When More is selected: (1)Select 2 -> 2 Sided.
When 2 -> 2 Sided is selected, specify in Originals and Copies, how the two sides of the 2-sided documents and copies are printed/to be printed. Select Head to Head in Originals/Copies for documents/ copies with two sides printed/to be printed in the same direction. Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

(2)Specify Originals and Copies.

Select Head to Toe in Originals/ Copies for documents/copies with the two sides printed/to be printed in opposite direction.

82

5.1 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying

(3)Check Original Orientation.


5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Confirm the documents are loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation.
Head to Top:
Head Head

Head to Left:

Head Head

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

(4)Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

83

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.2

Enlarging/Reducing Image
Reduce/Enlarge

This feature allows you to select a percentage (%) to enlarge or reduce your copy image. There are two ways to specify this %: a similar or different % for the length and width of the image.
The factory setting for this Reduce/Enlarge feature is 100%. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode. If you select Copy to Edge, you cannot select other enlargement/reduction options (Variable %, Independent X-Y %, Auto-Fit) or with Margin Shift, Multiple Up, or Repeat Image.

5.2.1

Same % for Length and Width

There are two ways to enlarge/reduce copies with a similar % for the length and width: Selecting from preset % Specifying your own %

Selecting from preset %


Options available are: Auto %
The % to enlarge/reduce the copies is automatically set based on the document size and paper size for copying. You cannot, however, select Auto for Paper Supply.
When Auto % is selected for Reduce/Enlarge or Auto for Paper Supply, the document image will be rotated to fit the orientation of the paper loaded for copying. However, this is only applicable when the document is loaded in the Head to Left orientation and the copy paper is smaller than A4 portrait. The image might be rotated 180 degrees when copying with stapling and punching settings.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

100%
The document image will be copied in the same size (100%).
You can fine-tune the value for 100% to between 98 and 102% in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

Preset %
Select from seven standard presets to enlarge/reduce a standard paper size to another standard paper size:
% 141% 122% 115% 86% 81% 70% 50% Paper size A4 to A3, B5 to B4 A4 to B4, A5 to B5 B4 to A3, B5 to A4 A3 to B4, A4 to B5 B4 to A4, B5 to A5 A3 to A4, B4 to B5 A3 to A5

84

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

Copy to Edge
When the document image fills right to the paper edge, there might be an image loss at the edge if it is copied at 100%. Selecting Copy to Edge will prevent this as the document image will be copied at a % slightly less than 100%. Select Copy to Edge together with 100%, Auto %, or any of the seven % of R/E Presets. You cannot, however, select Auto for Paper Supply.

Document

Auto %

100%

Preset %

Document

100%

100%, Copy to Edge

Making Copies

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

From Reduce/Enlarge, select the desired preset %. Select More to specify Originals or Original Orientation.

85

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

When More is selected: (1)Select R/E Presets, and select the %.

(2)Select Copy to Edge when you want to make copies slightly smaller than the document. (3)Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

86

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

Specifying your own %


You can specify your own % for copying. The % that can be set ranges from 25 to 400%, in 1% increments.
Copy Document A6 B6 A5 B5 A4 B4 A3 A5 141% 115% 100% 81% 70% 58% 50% B5 173% 141% 122% 100% 86% 70% 61% A4 200% 163% 141% 115% 100% 81% 70% B4 245% 200% 173% 141% 122% 100% 86% A3 282% 231% 200% 163% 141% 115% 100%

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Making Copies

From Reduce/Enlarge, select More.

87

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

To amend a specified %, select Clear and then re-enter the value.

Select Variable %, and specify the % by using the keypad on the screen or .

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

88

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

5.2.2

Different % for Length and Width

You can change the length or width of the document in different % for copying. Options available are: Independent X-Y %
Select a % each for the length (Y) and width (X) within the range of 25 to 400%, in 1% increments.

Auto-Fit
The % for the length (Y) and width (X) are automatically specified according to the paper size for copying.

Making Copies

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

If you are selecting Independent XY %, you cannot select Auto for Paper Supply.

1 2

Load the documents.

From Reduce/Enlarge, select More.


Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format

The Reduce/Enlarge screen is displayed.

89

Stored Job Templates

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

Select the option to specify the % for copying the length and width. When Independent X-Y % is selected:
The display for Independent X-Y % appears. Use the respective to specify the % for Y and X. When for XY is used, you can change the values of X and Y at the same time.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

When Auto-Fit is selected:


The display for Auto-Fit appears.

90

5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Check Original Orientation.


Confirm the documents are loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation.
Head to Top:
Head Head

Head to Left:

Head

Head

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

5 6

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

91

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.3

Selecting Paper Tray


Paper Supply

This feature allows you to select a paper tray loaded with the required paper size for copying. There are two ways to do this: the tray is automatically selected to match the document size or is manually specified.
The factory setting for this Paper Supply feature is Auto. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode. When a paper tray runs out of paper during copying, it will switch to another tray loaded with the same paper size/ type (for normal paper: 64-105 g/m2) and orientation to continue copying (Auto Tray Switching feature). You can specify this setting in the Tools Mode. If all the trays are loaded with the same paper size/type (normal paper 64-105 g/m2) and orientation, the paper trays will be switched in the order of trays 1, 2, 3, and 4. If the optional tray 6 (HCF) is installed, it will be switched first before the rest of the trays.

5.3.1
Auto

Automatically Selecting Paper Tray

Based on the detected document size and the % specified in Reduce/Enlarge, a paper tray loaded with the required paper size for copying will be selected automatically.
When paper is not loaded in the automatically selected tray or when the document size cannot be detected, a message will be displayed. Follow the instructions to proceed. When Auto % is selected for Reduce/Enlarge or Auto for Paper Supply, the document image will be rotated to fit the orientation of the paper loaded for copying. However, this is only applicable when a standard-sized document is being copied to a standard-sized paper smaller than A4. For non-standard paper sizes, the image cannot be automatically rotated. This feature is not applicable to tray 5 (bypass).

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

You cannot select Auto % for Reduce/Enlarge and Auto for Paper Supply at the same time. For details, refer to 5.2 Enlarging/ Reducing Image.

1 2

Load the documents.

From Reduce/Enlarge, select the desired % except Auto %. Check that Auto is selected for Paper Supply.

92

5.3 Selecting Paper Tray

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

5.3.2

Manually Selecting Paper Tray

The following procedure describes how to select a paper tray loaded with the desired paper size for copying. Options available are:
When the optional high capacity feeder is installed, select Tray 6 (HCF).

Tray 1, Tray 2, Tray 3, Tray 4


Select a paper tray loaded with the desired paper size.

Tray 5 (Bypass)
Select this for paper that cannot be loaded in tray 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Selecting trays 1, 2, 3, or 4
To select a paper tray from trays 1, 2, 3, or 4 that is loaded with your desired paper size.
When paper is not loaded in the selected tray or when the orientation of the document and the paper for copying differs, a message will be displayed. Follow the instructions to proceed.

Making Copies

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.


Basic Features

From Paper Supply, select the paper tray with the desired paper size.

93

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.3 Selecting Paper Tray

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

Selecting tray 5 (bypass)


To load paper in tray 5 for copying when it cannot be loaded in trays 1, 2, 3, or 4. You must specify the paper size and paper type when using tray 5 (bypass).
For details on the type of paper that can be loaded in tray 5 (bypass), refer to 2.1 Paper to Use.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Tray 5 (Bypass).

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Once paper is loaded in tray 5 (bypass), the Tray 5 (Bypass) screen will appear automatically.

The Tray 5 (Bypass) screen is displayed

94

5.3 Selecting Paper Tray

3
SRA3 refers to the size, 320 450 mm or 12.6 17.7. When you make copies on SRA3-sized paper, adjust the paper guide to the 12.6"/320 mm position. For details on adjusting the position of the paper guide, refer to 2.2.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass).

Select the paper size. When A/B Series Size is selected:


Select the specific paper size.

When Inch Size is selected:

Making Copies

When you make copies on 12 x 18sized paper, adjust the paper guide to the 12/305 mm position. For details on adjusting the position of the paper guide, refer to 2.2.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass).

The display for Inch Size appears. Select the specific paper size.

Basic Features Added Features

When Non-standard Size is selected:


The display for Non-standard Size appears. Use the values for X and Y respectively. and to specify

95

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.3 Selecting Paper Tray

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

4 5 6 7

Specify the setting for Paper Type.

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Load paper into tray 5 (bypass) if it is empty.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

96

5.4

Sorting Output
Output
Optional

This feature allows you to sort copies output. Options available for this feature are:

Auto
For documents placed on the document glass, copies are output by page numbers (e.g. page 1, 1, 12, 2, 23, 3, 3). For documents loaded in the DADF, copies are output by page sequence (e.g. page 1, 2, 31, 2, 31, 2, 3).

Auto (Large Output)


Available when the optional finisher is installed. Select this when the number of copies exceeds 500.

Collated
Copies are output in the specified sets by page sequence (e.g. page 1, 2, 31, 2, 31, 2, 3 ).

Document

Collated

Making Copies

Report Report

Rep

Uncollated
Copies are output in the specified sets by page number (e.g. page 1, 1, 12, 2, 23, 3, 3).
Basic Features

Document

Uncollated

Added Features

Rep Report Report

Image Quality Output Format

The Transparency option cannot be selected together with Collated or Uncollated. When Covers option cannot be selected together with Uncollated. Specify whether the copies should be output facing up or down. For details, refer to 5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down. You cannot output to the offset catch tray non-standard paper size with the X direction less than 171 mm or more than 297 mm.

Stored Job Templates

97

5.4 Sorting Output

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

If you are using the DADF to copy more than 51 sheets of documents, load the documents in batches. By using the High Document Volume feature, you can load documents in batches and yet copy them with the same settings. For details, refer to 5.9 Loading Documents in Batches.

1 2

Load the documents.

From Output, select how the copies are to be sorted.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select how the copies are be sorted.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made. Copies delivered to the finisher tray are divided into two stacks, forward and backward. When Off is selected for Large Output, the copies are delivered to the output tray without being offset even if Auto is selected.

98

5.5

Stapling
Output
Optional

This feature allows you to output copies collated and stapled by sets. Copies are output offset and can be stapled in two positions. The number of sheets that can be stapled is 2 to 50 (FX P paper) using the staple cartridge for 50 sheets (optional) and 2 to 100 (FX P paper) using the staple cartridge for 100 sheets. The maximum number of sheets for stapling is 65 for standard-sized paper longer than 8.511", or for non-standard size paper with a 216 mm edge parallel to the feeding direction.

Suitable paper sizes for stapling and staple positions


The following paper sizes and positions are suitable for stapling:
Position Paper Size

Top Left1

Top Right1

Top2

Left2

Right2

A4 portrait

Making Copies

B5 portrait, 16K portrait, 810" portrait, 8.511" portrait A3 A4, 8.511", B4, 8.513", 8.514", 1117", 8K

Basic Features

Document orientation Follow the diagram below for loading documents in the Head to Left orientation:

Added Features Image Quality

On the document glass

In the DADF

Output Format Stored Job Templates

99

5.5 Stapling

When a message prompting you to replace staple cartridge appears, the machine will not start even if you press the Start button. To proceed, replenish the staples first. For details, refer to 10.5 Replacing Staple Cartridge. When the positions for punching and stapling are in conflict (e.g. stapling on the top left and punching on the right), the machine will not start even if you press the Start button. Check the positions again. When tray 5 (bypass) is selected, stapling can be carried out only if Plain/Heavywt 1 is selected for Paper Supply. For non-standard paper size, only sizes within 210 297 mm (Y direction) and 182 432 mm (X direction) can be used. If you attempt to staple copies exceeding the maximum number of sheets, stapling will be cancelled. The maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 50 using the staple cartridge for 50 sheets (optional) and 100 using the staple cartridge for 100 sheets. You can replace the installed staple cartridge with the optional staple cartridge for 50 sheets. Contact your Customer Support Center for details. When option tray 7 is selected, staple positions are limited as follows. This limitation can be changed by means of a customer engineer setting. Contact our Customer Support Center for details. When Head to Top is selected for document orientation: The left side (Top Left 1 or Left 2) When Head to Left is selected for document orientation: The top side (Top Left 1 or Top 2) The Transparency option cannot be selected together with Repeat Image. If you are stapling Z-folded copies, the number of sheets that can be stapled is reduced.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

From Output, select how the copies are to be sorted.

When loading mixed-size documents, align the Y-direction edges of the documents.

Select Collated/Stapled/Punched.

100

5.5 Stapling

For details on the setting of punching, refer to 5.6 Punching Holes.

Form Stapling, select the staple position. Check Original Orientation.


Ensure that the correct orientation is selected.

Making Copies
Basic Features

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

5 6

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Added Features Image Quality

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

101

Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.6

Punching Holes
Output
Optional

When the optional finisher is installed, this feature allows you to output copies with punched holes. You can select the number of punch holes from 2 Holes or 4 Holes.

Suitable paper sizes for punching and punch positions


The following paper sizes and positions are suitable for punching:
Position Paper size B5 portrait, A4 portrait, 8.511" portrait A4, B4, A3, 1117"

Top

Left

Right

2 Holes

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

A4 portrait, 8.511" portrait 4 Holes A3, 1117"

Document orientation Follow the diagram below for loading in the Head to Left orientation:

On the document glass

In the DADF

When the punch scrap container is full, the machine will not start even if you press the Start button. Empty the punch scrap container. For details, refer to 10.6 Emptying Punch Scrap Container. When the positions for punching and stapling are in conflict (e.g. stapling on the top left and punching on the right), the machine will not start even if you press the Start button. Check the positions again. Punching cannot be carried out if tray 5 (bypass) has been selected. When option tray 7 is selected, punch positions are limited as follows. This limitation can be changed by means of a customer engineer setting. Contact our Customer Support Center for details. When Head to Top is selected for document orientation: The left side When Head to Left is selected for document orientation: The top side The Transparency option cannot be selected together with Repeat Image.

102

5.6 Punching Holes

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

From Output, select how the copies are to be sorted.

Making Copies

Select Collated/Stapled/Punched.

103

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.6 Punching Holes

For details on the setting of stapling, refer to 5.5 Stapling.

From Punching, select the punching positions. Check Original Orientation.


Ensure that the correct orientation is selected.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

5 6

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

104

5.7

Z-Folding
Output/Finishing/Z Fold
Optional

When the optional folding unit (Z and C) is installed, the feature allows you to make Z-folded copies. This section explains how to Z-folded copies using the Mixed Size Originals and stapling/punching features as an example. Available paper sizes for Z-folding are B4, A3, 1117", and 8 K.

Document

Copy

The Z Fold option cannot be selected with Output Orientation, Transparency, Book Duplex, Booklet Creation, or Folding.

Making Copies

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

Load the documents. When loading the same size documents: (1)If necessary, select Reduce/Enlarge and/or Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen. (2)Proceed to Step 2. When loading mixed-size documents:
Load only the documents with the same length for the edge to be inserted into the DADF. For example, load A4 portrait and A3 together, or B5 portrait and B4. The larger size copies will be Z-folded. For example, when you load an A4 portrait sheet with an A3 sheet, the A3 copy will be Z-folded.
Document of various sizes Copy

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

When loading mixed-size documents into the DADF and stapling the copies, Zholding can be performed only for available size sheets and stapling is cancelled for all the sheets.

105

5.7 Z-Folding

Edge A of the document refers to the edge that is to be inserted into the DADF.

(1)Align edge A and B of the documents. Load the documents aligned to the edge of the DADF.

3.2.2 Loading in DADF

(2)Select 100% for Reduce/Enlarge and Auto for Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen. (3)Select Mixed Size Originals on the Added Features screen.
The Mixed Size Originals screen appears.

5.15 Copying Mixed Size Originals

(4)Select On, and check Original Orientation. (5)Select Save.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select Output/Finishing/Z Fold on the Basic Features screen.

The Output/Finishing/Z Fold screen appears.

106

5.7 Z-Folding

Select On for Z Fold.

When selecting Z Fold with stapling/punching:


The copies are stapled as shown below depending on the position(s) specified for stapling or punching holes. When Top Left is selected
When Z Fold is selected with stapling/punching, the number of copies will be different from standard stapling/punching performance due to the location of the stapling and punching. When the positions for punching and stapling are in conflict (e.g. stapling on the top left and punching on the right), the machine will not start even if you press the Start button. Check the positions again.

When Top Right is selected

Making Copies

Stapling left side

Stapling right side

(1)Select Collated/Stapled/Punched and specify the position to be stapled or punched.


Basic Features

(2)Check Original Orientation.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Added Features

Press Start.
Image Quality

Copies will be made and output to the finisher tray.

107

Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.8

Making Sample Copies


Sample Set

When making multiple copies, you can output a single sample in advance. Making a sample copy allows you to confirm function settings and make sure that the copy appearance meets your expectations. The remaining copies will be made after the sample copy is confirmed.

Off
A sample copy is not made.

On
A sample copy is made. After one copy is made, the machine temporarily stops. After checking the sample copy, you can choose whether to make the remaining copies, or to cancel copying.
Pressing Start does not start copying if Uncollated has been selected. When Auto is selected, the copies are output in the Collated mode. Program Ahead cannot be selected during output of a sample copy. Interrupt copying is not possible while the screen prompting for sample copy verification is displayed. Sample copying cannot be selected when printing a file that has been saved on the server. The factory setting is Off for the feature. The factory setting can be changed on the system administrator screen. For the setting change procedure, see 8.1 System Administrator Mode.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

To cancel the Sample Copy feature, select Sample Set again.

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Sample Set on the Basic Features screen.

The Sample Copy feature changes to On.

108

5.8 Making Sample Copies

3 4 5

Specify settings for other features if necessary.

Press Start.
The document is scanned, a sample copy of the document is made according to the settings, then the machine temporarily stops. When a sample copy is output, a screen appears to prompt you to verify the copy.

Check the sample copy.

To continue copying:
To continue copying the remaining copies, select Start. The remaining copies will be made after the sample copy is confirmed.

When canceling copying:


To cancel copying of the remaining copies, select Cancel Job. The remaining copies are not made and the display returns to the Sample Set screen.

Making Copies

Changing the number of copies:


When changing the remaining number of copies, use the keypad to enter the number.

Canceling stapling/punching:
To output the remaining copies without stapling/punching, select Cancel Finishing.

109

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.9

Loading Documents in Batches High Document Volume

This feature allows you to load documents in batches for copying with the same settings. You can load your documents either on the document glass or in the DADF. When Next Original is selected on the screen that is displayed while scanning documents loaded in the DADF, the documents will be scanned continuously even if Off is selected for HighDocVol. Up to 50 sheets of documents can be loaded in the DADF at one time. If you have more than 50 sheets of documents, divide them into batches for loading. This section explains how to load your documents in batches in the DADF. Options available for this feature are:

Off
Only one batch of document is used for copying.

On
To load documents in batches for copying.
You cannot load documents both on the document glass and in the DADF. If you used the document glass for the first batch of documents, load the other batches on the document glass as well. The same goes for using the DADF.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Up to 1,000 pages of A4-sized pages can be loaded. However, depending on the document size, error messages may appear before 1,000 pages are scanned. The same goes for selecting the High Document Volume feature during interrupt copying. The feature is set to Off at shipping from the factory. The factory setting can be changed on the system administrator screen. For the setting change procedure, see 8.1 System Administrator Mode. A Screen will not be displayed during scanning if you load one set of documents without specifying any image feature and setting HighDocVol to On.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

To cancel the High Document Volume feature, select HighDocVol again.

1 2

Load the documents.


If you are using the DADF, do not load more than 50 sheets.

Select HighDocVol on the Basic Features screen.

The High Document Volume feature changes to On.

110

5.9 Loading Documents in Batches

3 4

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copying will begin.

When the stack of documents has been scanned for copying, a message will appear on the right of the screen as follows:

Making Copies

If paper jam occurs, reload the current stack of documents. For details on treating paper jams, refer to 9.3 Clearing Document Jams.

5 6 7

Documents loaded in the DADF will be placed in the output tray after being scanned. Remove them from the tray.
Ensure that the stack of documents that has been scanned for copying is not mixed up with the next stack to be scanned. If paper jam occurs, reload the current stack of documents for scanning.

Load the next stack of documents, and then press Start.


Scanning of the documents for copying will begin.
Basic Features

If you are using the DADF, do not lift up the document glass cover when changing the stack of documents.

When all the documents have been loaded, press End Job.
The remaining copy job starts. If you use the DADF to load the documents, you can also select and End Job on the screen that is displayed while the copy job is in progress.

111

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.10

Erasing Edges
Edge Erase

This feature allows you to erase shadows or marks that might be created at the edges or the center of the copies when copying bound documents. Options available for this feature are:

Top and Bottom Edges


Erases shadows at the top and bottom edges of the copies.The edges are erased based on the orientation of the document set. You can specify the width of the edge erase within 0-50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Left and Right Edges


Erases shadows at the left and right edges of the document.The edges are erased based on the orientation of the document set. You can specify the width of the edge erase within 0-50 mm in 1 mm increments.

Top Edge/Bottom Edge/Left Edge/Right Edge


Erases shadows at the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the document independently. You can specify each width within 0-50 mm in 1-mm increments.

Binding Erase
Erases shadows at the center of the copies when copying bound documents.You can specify the width of the binding erase within 0-50 mm in 1 mm increments.
Binding Erase cannot be used together with the Multiple Up or Repeat Image feature. When Binding Erase is selected with the Bound Originals feature, only half of the Binding Erase width will be erased.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Areas that can be erased


Top and Bottom Edges Left and Right Edges Binding Erase Top and Bottom Edge/Left and Right Edge/Binding Erase

area erased
This feature works based on the orientation of the document loaded. The edges will not be correctly erased if the document is not loaded in the direction specified in Original Orientation. For details, refer to 5.14 Specifying Image Orientation. If Multiple Up is selected together with Top and Bottom Edges or Left and Right Edges, the erase width applies to the individual documents before they are copied onto one sheet. The erase width applies to the document. Regardless of the erase width, there will be an image loss of approximately 3 mm off the edges of the copies. When Reduce/Enlarge is selected, the erase width is adjusted according to the reduce/enlarge percentage. When 2-Sided is selected, the erase width applies to both sides of the document. The factory settings for Top and Bottom Edges, Left and Right Edges, and Binding Erase are 2 mm, 2 mm, and 0 mm respectively. You can change the factory setting for Top and Bottom Edges and Left and Right Edges in Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode. You cannot change the factory setting for Binding Erase in Tools Mode.

112

5.10 Erasing Edges

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Edge Erase on the Added Features screen.

Making Copies

The Edge Erase screen is displayed.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

If you specify the width of the Edge Erase, select Variable Erase or Independent Variable Erase. When Variable Erase is selected:
You can specify the same value for the top and bottom edges or for the left and right edges.

(1)Select the item for which you want to specify the width of the Edge Erase.
Top and Bottom Edges is selected as an example:

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

(2)Using the keypad, enter the value for the Edge Erase.

113

5.10 Erasing Edges

(3)Select Top and Bottom Edges again to save the setting. When Independent Variable Erase is selected:
You can specify different values for the top, bottom, left, and right edges.

(1)Select the item for which you want to specify the width of the Edge Erase.
Top Edge is selected as an example:

Making Copies
5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

(2)Using the keypad, enter the value for the Edge Erase. (3)Select Top Edge again to save the setting.

Check Original Orientation.


Confirm the documents are loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation.
Head to Top:
Head Head

Head to Left:

Basic Features Added Features

Head Head

5 6

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

114

5.11

Shifting Image
Margin Shift

This feature allows you to shift the image position of the document for copying. You can also set a margin of white space on your copy. Options available for this feature are:

No Shift
The copies are made without shifting the image of the document.

Auto Center
The document is copied with its center shifted to the center of the copy paper.

Corner Shift
The document is copied with its image shifted to a selected corner of the copy paper.

Variable Shift
The document is copied with its image shifted to the top, bottom, left or right within a range of 0-432 mm, in 1 mm increments.

Making Copies

When Mixed Size Originals is selected, the images will be shifted based on the image position of the first document.

Document

Copy

Corner Shift

Auto Center
Basic Features

Document

Copy

Added Features Image Quality

(Variable Shift)

The direction of the margin shift is based on the orientation of the loaded document. If the document is not loaded in the orientation specified in Original Orientation, the direction of the shift will also be different. For details, refer to 5.14 Specifying Image Orientation. The margin shift value is based on the paper size. It will not be affected by the percentage changes in Reduce/Enlarge. The factory setting for this feature is No Shift. You can change the factory settings of Corner Shift and Variable Shift in Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

Output Format Stored Job Templates

115

5.11 Shifting Image

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Margin Shift on the Added Features screen.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

The Margin Shift screen is displayed.

Select Side 1.

The Side 1 screen is displayed.

Select the type of margin shift. When Auto Center is selected: Use to specify the values for Left/Right and Up/ Down.

116

5.11 Shifting Image

When Corner Shift is selected: Select a corner for the margin shift.

Making Copies
Basic Features

When Variable Shift is selected: Use to specify the values for Left/Right and Up/ Down.

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

117

5.11 Shifting Image

5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Check Original Orientation.


Confirm the documents are loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation.
Head to Top:
Head Head

Head to Left:

Head

Head

6 7
Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select Save when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the Margin Shift screen.

To adjust the margin shift for the reverse side, select Side 2 and then follow Steps 4 to 6 to select the position for the shift. When copying with the same settings as Side 1: When copying Side 2 with the same settings as Side 1, select Mirror Image.
Horizontally facing pages are copied symmetrically on the right and left sides. Vertically facing pages are copied symmetrically on the upper and lower sides.

8 9

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

118

5.12

Specifying Document Size


Original Size

This feature allows you to specify a document size for copying when using a non-standard size document or when the size of the document is different from the copy paper. Options available for this feature are:

Auto Size Detect


The document size is automatically detected.

Preset standard sizes


Select from the 13 preset standard paper sizes (A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, B5, B5 portrait, A5, 1117", 8.513", 8.511", 8.511" portrait).
The factory setting for the standard sizes are A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, B5, B5 portrait, A5, 117, 8.513, 8.511, 8.511" portrait. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode.

Specifying your own sizes


Specify your own document size within 10-432 mm for the X direction and 10-297 mm for the Y direction. You can use the scale on the sides of the document glass to help you when entering the size.

Making Copies

Document

Standard size

Document

Copy

Question

Question

Answer

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

119

5.12 Specifying Document Size

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Original Size on the Added Features screen.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

The Original Size screen is displayed.

Specify the document size. When specifying a standard size: Select from the standard sizes listed.

120

5.12 Specifying Document Size

When specifying a non-standard size: Use to specify the values for X and Y.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

121

5.13

Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets Bound Originals

This feature allows you to copy the facing pages of a bound document on separate sheets, in page sequence. You can also choose to copy in page sequence, only the left, right, top or bottom pages of the document onto one side of the paper. You can also use this feature together with the Binding Erase feature to create a blank border at the center. Options available for this feature are:

Off
The facing pages of the bound document are not copied on separate sheets.

Left Page Then Right


If Both Pages is selected, the bound document is copied from the left page first.

Right Page Then Left


If Both Pages is selected, the bound document is copied from the right page first.

Top Page Then Bottom


If Both Pages is selected, the bound document is copied from the top page first.

Document

Left Page Then Right

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features 3.2 Loading Documents Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

This feature cannot be combined with Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Covers, Mixed Size, Originals, or Auto Contrast of Image Quality Presets. When making two-sided copies from a bound document onto separate sheets of paper, refer to 5.16 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document.

Procedure

Load the documents on the document glass.


Document Right Page Then Left Top Page Then Bottom

122

5.13 Copying Facing Pages onto Separate Sheets

Select Bound Originals on the Added Features screen.

The Bound Originals (Scan Order) screen is displayed.

3
When Bound Originals is selected, the original orientation will be automatically set. As the original orientation will be set as Head to Top when Left Page Then Right or Right Page then Left is selected, and as Head to Left when Top Page Then Bottom is selected, be sure to load your documents correctly. For details on image orientation, refer to 5.14 Specifying Image Orientation. To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

Select the Bound Originals option and the pages of the bound document to be copied.

Making Copies

Here, we will illustrate by selecting Left Page Then Right and Both Pages.

Basic Features Added Features

If Left Page Only or Right Page Only is selected, only the image on the left pages or the right pages will be copied as a page image in the scanned order.

4 5 6 7

To specify Binding Erase, use

to specify the value.


Image Quality

Check the orientation of the document.


Output Format

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

123

5.14

Specifying Image Orientation Original Orientation

When you are using features like 2-Sided, Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Multiple Up, Image Repeat and Independent X-Y %, you have to use this feature to specify the image orientation. The setting for the image orientation will be the default set for these various features and which can be done on each of the screen of these features. Options available for this feature are:

Head to Top
The head of the document is aligned with the top edge of the document glass or the DADF.
Top edge Head Top edge

Place on document glass

Load in DADF

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Head to Left
The head of the document is aligned with the left edge of the document glass or the DADF. Ensure that you select Head to Left when the document is loaded in this way.
Head Left edge Left edge

Place on document glass

Load in DADF

When you are using the Bound Originals feature, the setting of Original Orientation does not matter: Head to Top will be set if Left Page Then Right or Right Page Then Left is selected for the Bound Originals feature; and Head to Left if Top Page Then Bottom is selected. The factory setting for Original Orientation is Head to Top. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode. However, when the default setting is changed to Head to Left, take note that the label and the display in the Tools Mode screen will be different.

124

5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Original Orientation on the Others screen.

When Original Orientation is selected after selecting the Bound Originals function, a screen is displayed to confirm whether the Bound Originals function is to be canceled. Perform operations as directed by the displayed screens.

Making Copies

The Original Orientation screen is displayed.

3
When Head to Left is selected for Original Orientation, refer to the diagram below for the correct way of loading the documents.

Select Head to Top or Head to Left based on the orientation of the document loaded.
When the documents are placed in the DADF:

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

4 5

Output Format

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

Stored Job Templates

125

5.15

Copying Mixed Size Originals


Mixed Size Originals

This feature allows you to scan documents of various sizes before copying them onto the corresponding copy paper sizes. Alternatively, you can make copies of these documents on one selected paper size.
This feature only works when documents are loaded in the DADF. Only standard-sized documents can be used for this feature. You cannot select Mixed Size Originals in combination with Multiple Up, Repeat Image, or Bound Originals.

Off
Select this when the document sizes are all the same.

On
Selecting this when copying documents of various sizes will enable the sizes to be detected automatically and then copied on suitable copy paper sizes. When Reduce/Enlarge is specified, the copies will be made on paper sizes based on the reduction/enlargement percentage.

Document

Copies of similar size as documents

Copies of similar size

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Report

Report
Report

Procedure

Edge A of the document refers to the edge that is to be inserted into the DADF.

Align edge A and B of the documents.


Remove any staples or clips. Copies might not be done well if the edge B of the documents are not aligned properly.

3.2.2 Loading in DADF

Load the documents aligned to the edge of the DADF.


Align edge A of the documents with the feeding point of the DADF and then align the documents with the document guide.

Ensure that edge A of the documents are aligned to the edge of the DADF.

126

5.15 Copying Mixed Size Originals

Specify settings for Reduce/Enlarge and Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen.

When copying images at 100% on paper of the same size as the documents:
Select 100% for Reduce/Enlarge and Auto for Paper Supply.

Making Copies

When copying mixed-sized documents onto one paper size:


Select Auto% for Reduce/Enlarge and a desired paper tray for Paper Supply.

Select Mixed Size Originals on the Added Features screen.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality

The Mixed Size Originals screen is displayed.

Output Format Stored Job Templates

127

5.15 Copying Mixed Size Originals

If the documents are not loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation, the copies obtained will not be as desired. Head to Top:
Head

Select On and check Original Orientation.

Head to Left:

Head

5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

6 7

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

128

5.16

Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document Book Duplex

Copies of facing pages in a bound document can be made with pages assigned so that they are in the same facing state as the document. A blank sheet is automatically inserted as the first page. The start and end pages can also be specified to the left or right of the facing pages.

Document
Blank Page

Document

Report

Left Page Then Right


Two sided copies are made from the left page of the bound document starting from the left page.

Making Copies

Right Page Then Left


Two sided copies are made from the right page of the bound document starting from the right page.

Top Page Then Bottom


Two sided copies are made from the top page of the bound document starting from the top page.
This feature cannot be combined with the Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Bound Originals, Auto Contrast, Mixed Size Originals, Transparency Separators, Booklet Creation features. Place documents on the document glass.

Procedure

Basic Features

You do not need to select the image orientation of your loaded original.

Confirm the orientation of the document before placing the bound document on the document glass.
Left Page Then Right Right Page then Left Top Page Then Bottom

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

129

5.16 Making Two sided Copies From a Bound Document

Select Book Duplex on the Added Features screen.

The Book Duplex screen is displayed.

3
Making Copies
Basic Features

Select the original type and Start Page & End Page.
For example, select Left Page Then Right.

4 5 6 7

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Specify the width for Binding Erase if necessary.

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

When the machine has finished scanning the last document, select End Job.

130

5.17

Adjusting Image Quality


Image Quality Presets

This feature allows you to change the document image to suit your purpose of copying. Once an image quality preset is selected for copying, image qualities like Lighter/Darker, Sharpness, and Density Control will be automatically adjusted. You can also fine-tune these image qualities after having selected an image quality preset. Options available for this feature are:

Normal
Copies will be made with the default settings of Lighter/Darker, Sharpness, and Density Control.

Background Suppression
Prevents images from the reverse side of the document from being copied when copying the front. Copies will be made based on the automatically selected settings of Lighter/Darker, Sharpness, and Density Control.

Auto Contrast
The image quality of the document will be automatically adjusted to produce a clear and sharp image. Copies will be made with the default settings of Lighter/Darker, Sharpness, and Density Control.

Making Copies

Document

Copy

Background Suppression

Basic Features

Auto Contrast

Added Features

Once an image quality preset has been selected, adjusting any image quality will automatically deselect it. Image Quality Selecting Normal will revert the settings of Lighter/Darker, Sharpness, and Density Control to the factory settings. You cannot select Auto Contrast in combination with Multiple Up or Bound Originals.

Output Format Stored Job Templates

131

5.17 Adjusting Image Quality

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select an image quality preset from Image Quality Presets on the Image Quality screen.

Making Copies

Once an image quality preset is selected, image qualities like Lighter/Darker, Original Type, Density Control, Sharpness will be automatically selected. A mark ( ) will be added to Original Type, Density Control, and Sharpness.

3
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

To adjust the settings of Original Type, Density Control and Sharpness, click their icons to display the screen for setting.
Once an image quality preset has been selected, adjusting any image quality will automatically deselect it.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

132

5.18

Adjusting Copy Density


Lighter/Darker

This feature allows you to adjust the copy density. Options available for this feature are:

Auto
The copy density will be automatically adjusted. However, if Photo or Map has been selected for Original Type, the copy density will be adjusted to the level of Normal.

Lightest-Darkest
You can select from seven levels of copy density from Lightest to Darkest.
Document Lightest Darkest

Making Copies

Auto cannot be selected together with any of the Lightest-Darkest levels. The factory setting is Normal. If any image quality preset has been selected, the copy density will be automatically set. Any copy density level set before selecting an image quality preset will be changed accordingly.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.


Basic Features

Select a copy density level from Lighter/Darker on the Image Quality screen.

You can adjust the copy density except Auto on the Basic Features screen. Auto cannot be selected together with any of the Lightest-Darkest levels.

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

133

5.19

Specifying Document Type


Original Type

This feature allows you to make fairly faithful copies of documents by selecting from one of the Original Type options to match the type of your documents. Options available for this feature are:

Text & Photo


Select this if the document contains both text and photographs. The text and photographs will be automatically detected, and will be further defined by the following options: Halftone.....................For documents with printed photos like magazines and pamphlets. Photograph ...............For documents with pasted photos. Light Text ..................For documents with very light text, to be made more suitable for copying.

Text
Select this for copying with clearer text. Photos, graphs and illustrations will also be copied clearly. Normal Text...............For printed documents or documents with copied or printed text. Pencil Text (Black) ...For documents written in black pencil. Light pencil marks will be copied in a darker tone.

Photo
Select this for copying photographs. Further options are: Halftone and Photograph.

Map
Select this for copying documents containing colored maps with text.
Photo & Text

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Text

Photo

Map

The factory setting is Normal Text of Text. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

Load the documents.

134

5.19 Specifying Document Type

Select Original Type on the Image Quality screen.

The Original Type screen is displayed.

Select an option according to your document type.

Making Copies

If you select Text:


Select the set of options displayed.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

135

5.19 Specifying Document Type

If you select Text & Photo:


Select the next set of options displayed.

If you select Photo:


Select the next set of options displayed.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

If you select Map:


Proceed to Step 4.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

136

5.20

Adjusting Density Control


Density Control

This feature allows you to adjust the density control in terms of low, medium and high density, each in seven levels.

Document

Copy

Low Density (high)


The factory setting is 0.

Medium Density (high)

High Density (high)

If any image quality preset has been selected, the density control settings will be automatically specified. Any density control level set before selecting an image quality preset will be changed accordingly.

Making Copies

The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Density Control on the Image Quality screen.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality

The Density Control screen is displayed.

Output Format Stored Job Templates

137

5.20 Adjusting Density Control

Specify the density control levels by each of the


The level of each density is displayed on the bar graph.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

138

5.21

Adjusting Sharpness
Sharpness

This feature allows you to adjust the sharpness of the image outline from five levels, Softer to Sharper.

Document

Copy

Softer
The factory setting is Normal.

Shaper

If any image quality preset has been selected, the sharpness level will be automatically specified. Any sharpness level set before selecting an image quality preset will be changed accordingly. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

Making Copies

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Sharpness on the Image Quality screen.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality

The Sharpness screen is displayed.


Output Format Stored Job Templates

139

5.21 Adjusting Sharpness

Select one of the levels from Softer to Sharper.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

140

5.22

Multiple-Documents Copying on One Copy Multiple Up

This feature allows you to copy two, four or eight sheets of documents on one copy. You can specify the order of the images to be copied. Options available for this feature are:

1 Up
Copy one sheet of document on one sheet of paper.

2 Up
Copy two sheets of documents on one sheet of paper.

4 Up
Copy four sheets of documents on one sheet of paper.

8 Up
Copy eight sheets of documents on one sheet of paper.

Document

2 Up

Document

4 Up

Making Copies

Document

8 Up
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

141

5.22 Multiple-Documents Copying on One Copy

This feature cannot be combined with the following features: Bound Originals, Binding Erase, Mixed Size Originals, Repeat Image, Auto Contrast of Image Quality Presets, or Copy to Edge of Reduce/Enlarge. When specifying your own % for the Reduce/Enlarge feature, you can only set within the range of 25-100%. An image loss might occur due to the size of the document image. When the actual number of sheets of documents is more than the one specified, the images will be copied in the same % on multiple pages. For example, if you have 9 sheets of documents and select 8 UP, 8 images (sheets) are reduced and copied on the first sheet of paper, but 9th original is copied by the same reduced percentage on the second sheet of paper. The factory setting for Multiple Up is Off. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

From Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen, select a paper tray with the desired paper size.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Do not select Auto for Paper Supply when you want to use the Multiple Up feature.

When Multiple Up is selected, Auto% will be automatically selected for Reduce/Enlarge. And when Multiple Up is selected together with Auto% for Reduce/ Enlarge, the machine will automatically set a ratio to enlarge/ reduce the image to fit the selected paper size. If Auto is selected for Paper Supply, an appropriate paper tray will be automatically selected.

Select Multiple Up on the Output Format screen.

The Multiple Up screen is displayed.

142

5.22 Multiple-Documents Copying on One Copy

4
To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

Select the option for Multiple Up and Image Order.


For example, select 4 Up.

5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Check Original Orientation.


Confirm the documents are loaded in the direction as specified in Original Orientation, the copy image layout obtained will not be as desired.
Head to Top:
Head Head

Making Copies

Head to Left:

Head

Head

Select Save to specify settings for other features.


Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

143

5.22 Multiple-Documents Copying on One Copy

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.

When documents are placed in the DADF:


Copies will be made on one sheet of paper according to the order the documents are being placed in the DADF and to the specified number of documents to be copied. When multiple documents are loaded in the DADF, Originals which counts the document pages loaded, will increase accordingly.

When documents are placed on the document glass:


When the document placed on the document glass has been scanned for copying, the following message appears.

Making Copies
(1)Replace the sheet of document on the document glass with the next sheet. (2)Press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made on one sheet of paper according to the documents used and the specified number of documents to be copied.
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

(3)When 4 Images or 8 Images is being selected, repeat Steps (1) and (2) until all the documents have been loaded. (4)Select End Job when all the documents have been loaded.
Copies will be made on one sheet of paper according to the specified number of documents to be copied.

144

5.23

Inserting Transparency Separators Transparency Separators

When copying on transparencies, this feature allows you to insert a blank sheet of paper of the same size and orientation between each pair of transparencies as a separator. To copy on transparencies, load them in tray 5 (bypass) and then select the correct paper type for the transparencies for copying. Load the paper to be used as separators in one of the trays 1, 2, 3 and 4 in the same orientation as the transparencies. Options available for this feature are:

Off
Separators will not be inserted between the transparencies.

On
Separators will be inserted between the transparencies. Also, you can specify whether or not to copy on the separators. When you select Blank Separators, copies will be made with blank separators inserted. When you select Printed Separators, copies will be made with separators inserted with the same image as those of the transparencies.

Making Copies

Document

Blank Separators
Transparencies

Report Report
Basic Features Added Features

Separators

To prevent machine breakdown or paper jam, do not load the transparencies in trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 and the optional trays 6 and 7. To prevent machine breakdown or paper jam, it would be advisable to use paper recommended by our company. For details see 2.1 Paper to Use.

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

145

5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators

This feature cannot be combined with the 2-Sided, Covers, Auto (Large Output), Collated, Uncollated Face Down of Output Orientation, Staple, or Punch options. The separators will not be used for copying and will be output as blank sheets. They will not be counted by the meters. However, they will be counted when Printed Separators is selected. When the optional tray 6 (HCF) is installed, you can load paper to be used as separators in it. You cannot select the tray 7 for Transparency Separators. When copying on transparencies with separators, you can copy only one set at a time.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

4.4 Copying on Transparency

1 2 3

Load the documents.

Load transparencies in tray 5 (bypass).

Select A/B Series Size and A4 P for Paper Type and Transp./ Hasvywt 1 for Paper Type.

Making Copies
Basic Features

4 5

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Load paper to be used as separators in the tray of your choice.

Select Transp Separators on the Output Format screen.

146

5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators

The Transparency Separators screen is displayed.

Select On, and Blank Separators or Printed Separators.


When you select On, options to specify whether to copy on the separators as well as the option of Paper Tray Settings will be displayed on the right of the screen.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features

Select Paper Tray Settings.


The Paper Tray Settings screen is displayed.

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

147

5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators

From Separators Tray, select the tray that you have loaded paper as separators in Step 4.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel. When paper selection is made from the Basic Features screen after selecting the Transp Separators function, a screen is displayed to confirm whether the Transp Separators function is to be canceled. Perform operations as directed by the displayed screens.

9 10

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Press Start.
Copies will be made.

148

5.24

Outputting Face Up/Down


Output Orientation

This feature allows you to specify whether copies should be output facing up or down. For copies that are output facing up, you can check the copies result. Options available for this feature are:

Auto
Automatically determines whether the copies should be output facing up or down.

Face Up
Copies are output facing up. When you select Collated, copies are delivered from the last page. When you select Uncollated, copies are delivered from the first page.

Face Down
Copies are output facing down.

Face Up Reverse Order


Copies are delivered from the first page facing up.

Document

Face Up

Face Down

Report

Report

Making Copies

When the paper tray or type selected cannot be used for the Face Down option, the copies will be output facing up. The following paper types cannot be output facing down: heavywt 2, postcard, transparency, 1218, and SRA3. The following paper tray cannot be used for the Face Down option: tray 5 (bypass).

Procedure
Basic Features

3.2 Loading Documents

Load the documents.

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

149

5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down

From Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen, select a paper tray with the desired paper size.

3
Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select Output Orientation on the Output Format screen.

The Output Orientation screen is displayed.

150

5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down

Select how the copies are to be output.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

5 6

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Making Copies

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

151

5.25

Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet Repeat Image

Multiple copies of an document image can be made on a single sheet of paper. Each document image is copied onto a single sheet of paper, and can be repeated within that sheet up to 8 times. The Repeat Image variations are as follows.

Off
Document images are not repeated.

2 Images
Two copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

4 Images
Four copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

8 Images
Eight copies of the document image are made on a single sheet of paper.

Document
2 Images

1-Sided Copy
4 Images 8 Images

Making Copies
2-Sided Copy
2 Images
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates The factory setting of the Repeat Image feature is Off. The factory setting of this function can be changed through the Tools and Auditron Administration Mode. To change the setting, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode. This feature cannot be combined with the Mixed Size Originals, Edge Erase, Covers, Bound Originals, Multiple Up, Copy to Edge, Punch, Staple, or Booklet Creation features. When using the document glass or when the document image extends to the paper edge, there might be an image loss at the edge. Interrupt copying cannot be used together with the Repeat Image feature. This machine automatically rotates images on the documents according to the number of image repetitions specified.

4 Images

8 Images

152

5.25 Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet

Procedure

When Auto is selected for Reduce/ Enlarge and Paper Supply, the preset % is calculated and automatically according to the document size and the specified number of image repetitions.

In the Basic Features screen, select the desired preset % and the paper tray from Reduce/Enlarge and Paper Supply.

Making Copies

5.1 1-Sided/2-Sided Copying

2 3

Select the document side to be read and the side of the copy paper to be used with 2 Sided. Select Repeat Image on the Output Format screen.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality

The Repeat Image screen is displayed.

Output Format Stored Job Templates

153

5.25 Making Multiple Copies on a Single Sheet

Select the number of image repetitions to be made on a single sheet of paper.


Here, we will select 2 Images.

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

5 6 7

Load the documents.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

154

5.26

Copying With Covers


Covers

This feature allows you to add papers that are not used for copying the body pages, like colored or heavy weight papers, as covers when copying. You can specify whether or not to copy on these covers. When copying is to be done on these covers, the cover sheet(s), added as the specified cover page(s), will be output copied with images. When copying is not to be done on the covers, the cover sheet(s), added as the specified cover page(s), will be output blank. Options available for this feature are:

No Covers
No covers will be added.

Front Cover Only


To copy with front covers added. When Blank Covers is selected, copies will be output with a blank sheet of front cover. When Printed Covers is selected, copies will be output with the first page of the document copied on the front cover.

Front & Back Covers


To copy with front and back covers added. When Blank Covers is selected, copies will be output with a blank sheet of front and back covers. When Printed Covers is selected, copies will be output with the first and last page of the document copied on the front and back cover respectively.

Making Copies

Back Cover Only


To copy with back covers added. When Blank Covers is selected, copies will be output with a blank sheet of back cover. When Printed Covers is selected, copies will be output with the last page of the document copied on the back cover.

Document
Front Cover Only
Last Page

1-Sided Copying
Front & Back Covers
Last Page

Back Cover Only


Last Page

Basic Features

1st page

1st page

1st page

Added Features

2-Sided Copying
Front Cover Only Front & Back Covers Back Cover Only

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

155

5.26 Copying With Covers

Load paper of the same size and orientation for the covers and the body pages. When using heavywt 1 paper as covers, load them in trays 2, 3, 4 and tray 5 (bypass). For details on heavy weight paper that can be used, refer to 2.1 Paper to Use. The following types of paper cannot be used: heavywt 2 (163-220 g/m2), transparency, and label. This feature cannot be combined with the following features: Bound Originals, Multiple Up, Transparency Separators, Mixed Size Originals, Collated, and Repeat Image. However, Blank Covers can be combined with Bound Originals. The factory setting of Booklet Creation Covers Tray is Tray 2. The factory setting can be changed in the Tools Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 8 System Administrator Mode Settings.

Output Orientation of Covers (Face Up or Down) When copying with covers attached, the output orientation for tray 5 (bypass) and tray 7 differs as follows:
With tray 5 (bypass) loaded, Face Up selected for Output Orientation and the papers to be used as covers are placed facing up, the covers will be output facing up. With tray 7 loaded, Face Up selected for Output Orientation and the papers to be used as covers are placed facing up, the covers will be output facing down.

The following table shows the image orientation on paper to be delivered to the finisher tray or the output tray. Tray 5 Tray 7 Output Orientation Original Orientation Select Not Select Not Select Delivered to Output Tray (Staple/Punch:Off) Delivered to Finisher Tray (Staple:Top Left/ Off) Tray 7

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Delivered to Finisher Tray (Staple:Top Left) Face Up


Last page

Head to Top

1st page

Head to Left Face Down


Last page

Head to Top

1st page

Head to Left

This feature is available if Normal/Heavywt 1 is selected for tray 5 (bypass). For more details on the orientation of the document and paper to be used as covers when copying with covers attached and with stapling/punching setting, refer to Appendix C Originals/Copies Orientation (With Covers).

156

5.26 Copying With Covers

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

Load paper of the same size and in the same orientation for both the covers and the body pages.

1 2 3

Load the documents.

Load paper to be used as covers in any of trays 1 to 7.

Select Covers on the Output Format screen.

Making Copies

The Covers screen is displayed.

Specify the types of covers to add.


After specifying the type of covers to add, Printing Page and Paper Tray Settings is displayed. Here, we will illustrate Front & Back Covers bring selected.
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

157

5.26 Copying With Covers

Specify whether or not to copy on the covers.

When selecting Front Cover Only:


When selecting Front Cover Only: Blank Covers: Outputs copies with the front cover blank. Printed Covers: Prints the external side of the front cover. Printed Covers (2 Sided): Prints the front cover equally as the body text. Only the external side of the front cover is printed in simplex copying but both the external and internal sides in duplex copying. When printing the internal side of the front cover in the simplex copying, place a blank sheet for the first page of the document.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

When selecting Front & Back Covers:


Blank Covers: Outputs copies with the front and back covers blank. Printed Covers: The external side of the front cover and the internal side of the back cover are printed in simplex copying. Printed Covers (2 Sided): Prints the front and back covers equally as the body text. The external side of the front cover and the internal side of the back cover are printed in simplex copying. Both the external and internal sides of the front and back covers are printed in duplex copying. Printed Covers (2 Sided-Front)(1 Sided-Back): Prints the external and internal sides of the front cover in duplex copying. The last page of the document is printed on the external side of the back cover in duplex copying but not in simplex copying.

When selecting Back Cover Only:


When selecting Front Cover Only: Blank Covers: Outputs copies with the front cover blank. Printed Covers: Prints the external side of the front cover. Printed Covers (2 Sided): Prints the front cover equally as the body text. Only the external side of the front cover is printed in simplex copying but both the external and internal sides in duplex copying. However, the simplex document has odd-numbered sheets, the last page is printed on the interval side of the back cover.

158

5.26 Copying With Covers

6
When Printed Covers is selected, you can select only Normal/ Heavywt 1 for tray 5 (bypass). When Printed Covers is selected, you cannot use tray 7 for covers. You cannot make two-sided copies when selecting Normal/Heavywt 1 of tray 5 (bypass).

Select Paper Tray Settings.

The Paper Tray Settings screen is displayed.

Select the same size and orientation of paper for covers and body pages. You can select the different size paper for covers and body pages when combining with the Z-fold feature. In this case, the long edge of paper must be the same length as the short edge of other paper (B4, A3, 1117", or 8K) to be folded. The Mixed Size Originals feature can be combined with Auto of Body Pages Tray.

From Front Cover Tray and Back Cover Tray, select the trays that you have loaded paper for the covers in Step 2. From Body Pages Tray, select the tray that you will load paper for the body pages.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features

When specifying Quantity:


When the front cover tray is selected, you can specify the number of cover sheets in the range between 1 and 99 for insertion. Use this option as required to specify the number of cover sheets inserted into each set when necessary number of sheets are loaded.
No. of Sheet = 2 in simplex copying First Set Second Set

Image Quality Output Format

Report

Report

Stored Job Templates

159

5.26 Copying With Covers

(1)Select Quantity.

(2)Specify the number of sheet that machine needs to feed from the paper tray for each copy set.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

8 9

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

160

5.27

Creating a Booklet
Booklet Creation

This feature allows you to copy four pages of document onto a sheet of paper. To create a booklet, fold the copies in half. You can also set the center binding margin (gutter) and add front/back covers.

Document

Left-Bound

Right-Bound

Document

Top-Bound

Making Copies
When the optional booklet maker finisher is installed, you can create bi-folded booklets or stapled booklets folded in half. When Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling is selected, the available paper sizes are A4, 8.511", 8.513", 8.514", B4, A3, 1117", 8 K, and non-standard size (square paper or rectangular paper with a longer X-direction edge, both paper are ranging from 210-297 mm in the Y-direction and 279-432 mm in the X-direction).
Basic Features

Document
Bi-Fold

Copies
Bi-Fold + Stapled

Added Features Image Quality

Up to 1000 sheets of documents can be scanned. Up to 60 pages can be scanned when you select Bi-Fold + Stapling. If scanning exceeds 60 pages, a screen appears and prompts you to cancel stapling, folding in half and stapling, or copying. You cannot set 1 -> 1 Sided, 2 -> 1 Sided, Uncollated, Mixed Size Originals, Covers, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Transparency, Stapling, Punching, and Build Job by combination. If center margin (Gutter) and image shift (see Section 5.11) are both set, the image is shifted the sum of the image shift and the center margint. The total shift distance = image shift + Gutter (any) mm. When using tray 5 (bypass) for covers in booklet creation, select Plain/Heavywt 1 for the paper quality. If the Annotation feature is set, stamp and other information is given to the right and left sides (or the upper and lower sides) respectively.

Output Format Stored Job Templates

161

5.27 Creating a Booklet

Procedure

You cannot select Auto for Paper Supply. Paper should be loaded in the paper tray in the horizontal direction.

1 2

Specify the tray that you loaded paper in the horizontal direction from Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen. Select Booklet Creation on the Output Format screen.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

The Booklet Creation screen appears.

Specify the copy binding position.


After specifying the copy binding position, Covers, Gutters, Folding/Stapling (optional) and Paper Tray Set are displayed. Here, we will illustrated Left Bind to be selected.

162

5.27 Creating a Booklet

3.2 Loading Documents

Load the documents.


Document direction Document direction

Long edge feed

Short edge feed

Short edge feed

Long edge feed

Specify settings for other features if necessary. When creating a booklet with covers: (1)Select a covers method.

Making Copies

Printed Covers: Prints also on the cover sheet. Blank Covers: Does not print on the cover sheet.
Basic Features

(2)Select Paper Tray Settings.

Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

The Paper Tray Settings screen appears.

163

5.27 Creating a Booklet

Orient the cover tray and paper tray in the same direction as the loaded paper. If tray 5 (bypass) or tray 7 is specified as the cover tray, cover pages cannot be printed.

(3)Select paper trays at Covers Tray and Body Pages Tray, and Save.

When selecting Image Order:


You can specify this option when selecting Printed Covers for Cover.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Original Order: Pastes images in page order. Depending on the number of documents, the last page may become blank. Last Original as Back Cover: Pastes the final image to the last page. The last page always has an image. Depending on the number of documents, the previous page from the last may become blank. The front cover is double-sided copies.

164

5.27 Creating a Booklet

When creating a booklet with a center margin (gutter): (1)Select Gutter.

You can set the center margin (gutter) in the range from 0 to 50 mm by 1 mm increments.

The Gutter screen appears.

(2)Set the center margin with

or

165

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.27 Creating a Booklet

When selecting Folding/Stapling:


If Bi-Fold + Stapled is selected for a copy of one page, stapling will automatically be cancelled and a folded copy will be output. The number of copies that can be stapled is 2 to 14 if Printed Covers is not selected for Covers.

When the optional booklet maker finisher is installed, you can select Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapled. If Bi-Fold + Stapled is selected, the copies are folded in half and stapled at the center. The number of copies that can be stapled is 2 to 15.

(1)Select Folding/Stapling.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features To cancel any setting, select Cancel. If you select Booklet Creation and then select the paper on the Basic Features screen, a screen appears to confirm whether to cancel the Booklet Creation feature. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to perform the operation.

The Folding/Stapling screen appears.

(2)Select Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling.

6 7

Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary. Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

When Bi-Fold or Bi-Fold + Stapling is selected:


The copies are output to the booklet output tray in sets of 5 sheets each when Bi-Fold is selected.

Copies are output to the booklet output tray. Refer to 4.7 Removing Copies from the Booklet Output Tray to remove the copies.

166

5.28

Copying with Stamp or Date


Annotation

This machine can output copies with stamps, page numbers, and copy management numbers that are not in their originals. Stamp types, date formats, and page number formats are prepared for selection. The annotation added to the copy can be selected from four types. You can also set the annotation position and font.
Document Stamp Date Page Numbering Set Numbering

Report

Report
URGENT

Report

Report

Report

Stamp
Outputs copies with stamps of CONFIDENTIAL, Copy Prohibited, URGENT, IMPORTANT and For Distribution.

Making Copies

Date
Outputs copies with dates.

Page Numbering
Outputs copies with page numbers.

Set Numbering
Prints the control number in the background in grey for each set. This serial number relates a copy to a person to prevent the copying of a secret document distributed at a meeting.
When files are merged, the annotation features set to the originals become invalid.

Basic Features

Even when Reduce/Enlarge, Margin Shift, or Edge Erase is set, the sizes of annotation images and characters do not change. In Multiple Up, annotations are printed on a whole page where multiple images are arranged. In Repeat Image or Booklet Creation, annotations are printed each on the right and left sides (or the upper and lower sides). The annotation feature does not work on a blank separator or cover where no document image is printed. If Stamp, Date, Page Numbering, and Set Numbering are specified simultaneously for annotations, copying is not canceled even when the image and character positions overlap. Check each position before starting a copy job. If Stamp, Date, Page Numbering, are specified for annotations in duplex copying, the annotations are arranged symmetrically on the right and left and right sides for copying a book or booklet. Page 1 Report Page 2

Added Features Image Quality Output Format

Side 1

Side 2

Side 1

Side 2

Stored Job Templates

167

5.28 Copying with Stamp or Date

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Annotation on the Output Format screen.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

The Annotation screen appears.

Set On to Stamp, Date, Page Numbering or Set Numbering for annotation.

168

5.28 Copying with Stamp or Date

When printing Stamp:


Specify Options, Print On, Position, and Font/Size.
A stamp is printed at a position adjacent to the square 20 mm inside from the top, bottom, right and left edges of paper. A customer engineer is permitted to adjust the printing position. Consult your Customer Support Center. A customer engineer is permitted to change the stamp printing density. Consult your Customer Support Center.

When printing Date:


Specify Display Format, Print On, Position, and Font/Size.
A date is printed at a position adjacent to the square 10 mm inside from the top, bottom, right and left edges of paper. A customer engineer is permitted to adjust the printing position. The setting is common to page number printing. Consult your Customer Support Center.

169

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.28 Copying with Stamp or Date

When printing Page Numbering:


A page number is printed at a position adjacent to the square 10 mm inside from the top, bottom, right and left edges of paper. A customer engineer is permitted to adjust the printing position. The setting is common to date printing. Consult your Customer Support Center. To enter the start number, select Enter first. Use the keypad to specify the number and select Enter again.

Specify Display Format, Print On, Position and Font/Size.

When printing Set Numbering:


A customer engineer is permitted to change the copy management printing size and density. Consult your Customer Support Center. The start number is from 1 to 9999 for printing. After 9999, the number will return to 1 and start incrementing again.

A serial number is printed for each set of copies. If the start number is set to 1, 1 is printed on all pages of the first copy and 2 is printed on all pages of the second copy.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

(1)Select Enter.
The keypad on the control panel changes to the setting keys for Numbering.

(2)Enter a number by using the keypad.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

170

5.29

Copying on Tab Paper


Tab Copying

You can copy images from a document onto tab paper by specifying the copied position within a range of 1-15 mm so that the image would be copied onto the tab. These copied papers can be loaded in Tray 7 and used as covers or separators. Available tab paper sizes are A4 portrait and 8.511" portrait.
Be sure to use the tab paper recommended by Fuji Xerox. Otherwise, a paper jam or failure may result.

Document
Copy to Tab
Report Report

Copy
Shift All
Report

using copies as cover separators

Report

Report

Report Report

Making Copies

Original Size

Range of shifting the image (1-15 mm)

Copy to Tab
The image is copied only onto the tab of the tab paper. You can specify the position to shift within a range of 1 to 15 mm.

Shift All
The entire page is copied onto the tab paper. You can specify the position to shift within a range of 1 to 15 mm.
The factory setting for the margin shift is 13 mm. Tab Copying cannot be selected with Margin Shift, Edge Erase, Binding Erase, Multiple Up, Repeat Image, Booklet Creation, Annotation, Bound Originals, Book Duplex, or 2 Sided Copying features. It is recommended that 100% for Reduce/Enlarge is set to copy onto the correct position. You can select only the left position for stapling/punching on tab papers.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

171

5.29 Copying on Tab Paper

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

Select Tab Copying on the Output Format screen.

The Tab Copying screen appears.

If you select Tab Heavywt 1 (64-128 g/m2) for Paper Type, the copies cannot be output facing up. If you select Tab Heavywt 2 (129-162 g/ m2), the copies cannot be output facing down.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select Copy to Tab or Shift All, specify the amount of shifting, and options for Tab Stock Size and Paper Type.

172

5.29 Copying on Tab Paper

5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

3 4

Load the document.


Check that the orientation of the loaded document is as shown below.
Head Head

Load the tab paper in tray 5 (bypass).


Load the paper with the side to be copied facing up and with the edge opposite to the tab to be fed first.

Press Start.
Copies will be made.

173

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

5.30

Outputting Bi-Folded or TriFolded Copies Folding


With the booklet maker finisher installed Optional

If the booklet maker finisher (optional) is installed, the copies can be folded in half. Additionally, if the optional folding unit (Z and C) is installed, the copies can be folded in thirds outward (TriFold Out) or inward (Tri-Fold In). You can copy on either side of the paper. Available paper sizes for bi-fold are A4, 8.511", 8.513", 8.514", B4, A3, 1117", 8 K, and non-standard size paper with the Y-direction of 210-297 mm and the X-direction of 279-432 mm. Available paper sizes for Tri-Fold In and Tri-Fold Out are A4 and 8.511".

Document
Bi-Fold

Copy
Tri-Fold In Tri-Fold Out

Making Copies
The Folding feature cannot be selected with Auto for Paper Supply, Transparency, Covers, Booklet Creation, Book Duplex, Output/Finishing or Output Orientation features. If Auto is selected for Collated/Stapled/Punched, the copies are output uncollated. You cannot select tray 5 (bypass) and other trays loading portrait paper for this features. Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

174

5.30 Outputting Bi-Folded or Tri-Folded Copies

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Folding on the Output Format screen.

Making Copies

The Folding screen appears.

The contents of the screen may differ according to the optional products installed.

Select the type of folding and the side to be copied.


Bi-Fold and Print Inside are selected as an example.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

175

5.30 Outputting Bi-Folded or Tri-Folded Copies

To cancel any setting, select Cancel.

4 5

Select Save to specify settings for other features if necessary.

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
Copies will be made.

When Tri-Fold Out or Tri-Fold In is selected:


If the Tri-Fold Output Tray button is pressed while the machine is working, the print job will pause and the tri-fold output tray will open. If this happens, remove all the copies from the tray.

The copies are output to the tri-fold output tray. Refer to 4.6 Removing Copies from the Tri-Fold Output Tray to remove the copies.

When Bi-Fold is selected:


The copies are output to the booklet output tray. Refer to 4.7 Removing Copies from the Booklet Output Tray to remove the copies.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

176

5.31

Job Template Settings for Copying Stored Job Templates

This feature allows you to store, and to recall by just selecting a button, frequently-used settings for copying. You can therefore use this feature to program settings that are complicated or used very often. Options available for this feature are:

Store Job Templates


Stores the programmed settings in the memory.

Recall Job Templates


Recalls the programmed settings stored in the memory for copying.

Delete Job Templates


Deletes the programmed settings stored in the memory.

Enter/Change Job Name


Enters or changes a name for a job.

5.31.1 Storing Job Templates


The following procedure explains how to store programmed settings in the memory.

Making Copies

Procedure

1 2

Select the settings you wish to store.

Select Stored Job Templates.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format

The Stored Job Templates screen is displayed.


Stored Job Templates

177

5.31 Job Template Settings for Copying

Select Store Job Templates and a job number to store your settings.

4
If you change the stored setting for the job, delete the job first, then store a new setting.

Select a screen to be displayed when recalling a job.

Making Copies
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

Select Basic Features to display the Basic Features screen. Select Last selected to display the last screen that was stored in Step 1.

Select Save.
The setting will be saved.

178

5.31 Job Template Settings for Copying

5.31.2 Entering the Job Name


Procedure

Select Enter/Change Job Name, and the number of the job name.

Making Copies

The Change Job Name screen is displayed.

Enter the name and select Save.

Basic Features Added Features Image Quality

You can set the same name as the existing job.

Output Format

Stored Job Templates

179

5.31 Job Template Settings for Copying

5.31.3 Deleting Job Templates


The following procedure explains how to delete a stored setting from the memory.

Procedure

Select Delete Job Templates and the job number to be deleted.

Making Copies
Select Cancel if you do not wish to delete the job. Basic Features Added Features Image Quality

Select Confirm if you wish to delete the job.

Output Format Stored Job Templates

180

5.31 Job Template Settings for Copying

5.31.4 Recalling Job Templates


The following procedure explains how to recall programmed settings stored in the memory.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Recall Job Templates and the job number to retrieve.

Making Copies

Press Start.
Copies will be made.
Basic Features Added Features Image Quality Output Format Stored Job Templates

181

5.32

Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

You can use the Build Job feature to first scan documents with different copying settings while separating them by pages and document stacks, save the settings in the server memory, and lastly output all the copies at the same time. When copying multiple sets of copies, you can first copy a sample to check the results. You can specify whether to save these files specified in Build Job mode into the server.

Document

Copy
The preset number copies is made

Report
First Setting

Report

Report

Second Setting Third Setting

Making Copies
You cannot do Interrupt copying while using the Build Job mode.

Sample Set
One copy is made

Report

In a single build job, up to 200 stacks of documents can be scanned with different copying settings. If the machine is not touched fro a certain time after Build Job mode is selected, the display automatically returns to the default screen (Copy screen). Specify settings for Annotation, Covers, Separators, and Output/Finishing on the first screen. When you select On for Save to File (at step 7), the file is saved facing down even if you have selected any option for Output Orientation.

Procedure

3.2 Loading Documents

1 2

Load the documents.

Select Build Job.


The Build Job screen appears.

182

5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

If necessary, specify settings for Annotation, Output Orientation, Covers, Separators, and Output/Finishing/Z Fold.

When adding annotation:


5.28 Copying with Stamp or Date

The setting is applied to a whole job. Select Stamp, Date, Page Numbering or Set Numbering.

Making Copies

When specifying Output Orientation:


When you select On for Save to File (at step 7), the file is saved facing down even if you have selected any option for Output Orientation.

The setting is applied to a whole job. Select Auto, Face Up, or Face Up Reverse Order. Only Auto is available when specifying Output/Finishing.

When adding covers:


The setting is applied to a whole job. Nothing can be copied onto the cover. The number of covers can be set from 1 to 99 as required. This cannot be set with the separators function.

5.26 Copying With Covers

When inserting separators:


You can insert a blank piece of paper as separator between segments. Nothing can be copied onto the separators. The number of separators can be set from 1 to 99 as required.

5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators 5.26 Copying With Covers

When there are stacks of documents that do not need separators: Select Blank Covers of Covers on the Output Format screen for the first document. Then, select No Covers of Covers for the stacks of documents that do not need separators.

When specifying Output/Finishing/Z Fold:


The setting is applied to a whole job. If you add covers or insert separators, Y directions of the covers, separators, and paper to be copied must be the same length. For details about paper size for folding, refer to 5.7 Z-Folding.

183

5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

4 5
In Build Job mode, Collated and Uncollated cannot be selected. You can use registered settings of Stored Job Templates for Build Job. However, the setting of Build Job cannot be programmed in the memory.

Select Start.
The screen to build the job appears. The example used in this explanation assumes that Annotation, Covers, Separators, and Output/Finishing options are not selected.

Specify settings for copying.

Making Copies

To cancel the current selections:


When you press Clear All, the screen for canceling settings is displayed. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.

6
Settings for documents that have been scanned for copying cannot be changed.

Press Start on the control panel.


The scanning of documents for copying will begin.

Once the scanning is completed, the display will return to the Build Job screen.

184

5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

7
To cancel Build Job, select End Job and after you have checked the screen that appears to prompt you for confirmation, the display returns to the initial Build Job screen, where the setting for the very first document is not specified yet.

Select Next.
When On is selected, the files set for Build Job are saved for copying or merging later. When Off is selected, the files set for Build Job are not saved.

The Copy screen is displayed.

8 9 10
When clearing the settings of Build Job, select any other mode (e.g. Copy).

Making Copies

Load the next document and repeat the steps above as necessary. Enter the number of copies by using the keypad.
A value input after all the documents are scanned becomes valid as the number of copies.

End Build Job. When making sample copies:


When making multiple copies, you can first copy one set as sample to check the results. When copying the remaining sets, the number of sets copied will be the number specified less the sample set.

(1)Select End Job (Sample Set).

185

5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

Only one set with the specified Build Job settings will be copied. Once copying is done, the Sample Set screen is displayed.

(2)Check the results of the sample copies.


If the sample set is not satisfactory and you want to stop copying the remaining sets, select Cancel Job. When the Punch or Staple option is selected, selecting the Copy button above the folder tabs cancels the Punch or Staple setting and starts copying of the remainder of the documents. To cancel the copying in progress, select Stop on the screen and then press the C button.

(3) If necessary, enter the number of copies desired using the keypad.
The number of copies can be changed after sample copy output is completed.

Making Copies

(4)Select Start.
The specified settings of the Build Job mode are saved to the server once all the copies are output.

When starting copying without making a sample copy: (1)Select End Job (Start).

When On is specified at Save to File, the Folder List (Copy File) screen appears.

186

5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

(2)Specify a file folder and select Select Folder.

Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

To cancel copying in progress, click Stop on the screen and press the C button.

Copying starts. In Build Job mode, files are not remotely copied.

When saving file without copying:


The Build Job settings are finished and the file is saved without copying.

Making Copies

(1)Select End Job (Save File).

187

5.32 Copying Documents of Different Settings (Build Job)

(2)Specify a file folder and select Select Folder.

Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

File saving starts.

11

To exit Build Job mode, select any other mode (e.g. Copy).

Making Copies

188

6 Server
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 About Server.....................................................................190 Setting Folders .................................................................192 Saving Data.......................................................................207 Editing Files......................................................................214 Copying and Moving Files...............................................227 Printing Files ....................................................................232

6.1

About Server

Using server allows you to save scanned documents for copying as well as the copy settings to the server as a copy file. When you need to copy the same documents with the same settings again, you can use the file stored in the server to print out the copies without scanning. When you save data, select folders in the server.
In this manual, document data that has been scanned and saved to disk and files that have been merged or edited are referred to as "copy files." In the procedure explanations, they are also referred to as "files." For details about the folder, refer to 6.2 Setting Folders.
Machine A Scan Print

Report

Report

Save

Folder

When you save scanned documents in the shared folder (No.30), the file can be accessed, retrieved, and printed at other linked machines. Also, link folders (No.31-36) allows you to access, retrieved, and print files in the shared folder of the linked machine. you can send files to the linked machines and print them automatically. Up to six machines can be linked.

Server
Network Access/ Retrieve
Link Folder

Machine A Save
Report

Folders

Shared Folder

FTP Folder

Link Folders

You can access, retrieve, and print a file stored in folder 30 of Machine C, if Machine C is assigned to folder 36 at Machine A.

Print

Report

Save

Shared Folder

You can access, retrieve, and print a file stored in folder 30 of Machine A, if Machine A is assigned to one folder of 31 to 36 at Machine B. Machine C

Machine B

190

6.1 About Server

Whether the optional stapler or optional booklet maker finisher, paper tray 7 (At Document Centre 2101VS, it is an option.), and optional HCF are installed or not, this machine can be linked to other machines (Document Centre 2101S / Document Centre 2101VS) through a network. For stapling/punching and automatic printing from a specified tray, the options should be installed on both machines connected and the paper tray settings should be made identical. For an effective use of a network-linked machine, it is recommended to make the option configuration and the paper size and direction on a tray identical to those of the linked machine. If the optional HCF for the finisher is not installed on the linked machine, a file for HCF at the linked machine cannot be printed automatically. If the optional tray 7 is not installed on the linked machine (Document Centre 2101VS), a file for the tray 7 at the linked machine cannot be printed automatically. If a file other than Auto for Paper Supply is transferred to print automatically when the paper size and direction in each paper tray of the linked machine are different, the linked machine cannot print the file automatically. (For Auto Print, the paper size and direction on each paper tray should be made identical.) A file with Auto for Paper Supply can be printed automatically if the linked machine has a tray where paper of the same size and direction is loaded. If a file with Output options is transferred to print automatically when the optional finisher is not installed on the linked machine (Document Centre 2101VS), the linked machine can print the file automatically to the offset catch tray. The file can be output according to the settings of sorting and stacking.

This chapter is divided into six sections as follows. Step 1 About Server Step 2 Setting Folders Step 3 Saving Data Step 4 Editing Files Step 5 Copying and Moving Files

Server

Step 6 Printing Files

191

6.2

Setting Folders

This section explains the procedure for setting a folder to save a file and for setting a link destination folder. The procedure for setting a folder name is also explained.
If the machine is connected to a network, link folders 31 to 36 and FTP folders 37 to 42 can be set.

6.2.1

Roles of the Folders

There are 42 folders are available for saving a file. 30 folders are for the server of this machine, 6 are link folders for network-connected machines, and 6 are FTP folders for FTP servers. The folder types, property settings, and functions are as follows.
Folder Type Items Setting items Description

Password
None or 4-digit code

Storage Folder(s)

Remote link folder No. 1 to 29


Ordinary folders for storage existing in this machine You can set whether to copy a job into a link folder when saving or reprinting the job. Select none or a link folder from No. 31 to 36.

Function

Saving file Renaming, deleting, or editing a file Copying/moving a file


You can copy or move a file to any folder.

Server
No. 30
An open folder existing in this machine. This folder can be accessed from linked machines. All files transferred from the linked machine are saved in this folder.

Setting items

Password
None or 4-digit code

FTP password
You can set an FTP password can be set. The FTP password is required when accessing this machine from a linked machine. (The login name is fixed to dc1010s.)

Auto print
You can specify whether to automatically print a non-output job.

Auto print retry interval


You can specify the interval for retrying the auto print if it fails to print. None, or from 1 to 60 minutes can be specified.

Shared folder

Function

Saving a file Renaming, deleting and editing a file Auto print


A non-output job is printed automatically.

Copying/moving a file
You can copy or move a file to any folder.

Other

A file that has been programmed with the Auto Print feature is displayed as an icon with a clock mark attached. When you manually reprint a file with a clock mark, the auto print is completed.

192

6.2 Setting Folders

Folder Type

Items Setting items

Description

Password
None or 4-digit code

Remote IP address No. 31 to 36


Shared folders of networkconnected machines. Up to six machines can be connected. A linked machine is assigned to each folder. You can set the IP address of a linked machine.

Link folder(s) FTP folder(s)

Remote FTP password


You can set the FTP password of a linked machine. (The login name is fixed to dc1010s.)

Function

Handling of files stored in linked machine


You can request reprint.

Copying files
You can copy a file to any folder.

Setting items

Password
None or 4-digit code

Remote IP address No. 37 to 42


FTP servers. Up to 6 FTP servers can be connected. A server is assigned to each folder. You can set the IP address of a linked FTP server. (The login name is fixed to dc1010s.)

Remote FTP password


You can set the FTP password of a linked FTP server.

Function

Handling of files stored in a linked server


You can request reprint and deletion of files.

Copying/moving files
You can copy or move a file to any folder.

Link folders (No. 31 to 36) and FTP folders (No. 37 to 42) are displayed if either the IP address or the FTP password is set. You cannot move a file from a link folder (No. 31 to 36). You cannot copy or move a file in a storage folder (No. 1 to 29), the shared folder (No. 30), a link folder (No. 31 to 36), or a FTP folder (No. 37 to 42) to the same folder containing the source file.

193

Server

6.2 Setting Folders

6.2.2

Setting Storage Folders

The following procedure explains how to set a password and a remote link folder to storage folders (No.1 to 29) when necessary.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen appears.

2
Server

Select Create/Change Folder.

The Create/Change Folder (Copy File) screen appears.

194

6.2 Setting Folders

3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

Specify one folder from 1 to 29 and then select Select Folder.

The Create/Change Folder screen appears.

Specify an item to register its value and then select Modify.

195

Server

6.2 Setting Folders

When specifying Password:


You can restrict user access to the folders if you set a password for the folders. Set Password if necessary. Set the Password with a four-digit numeric value.

(1)Enter a Password and then select Confirm.

When entering a Password, use the numeric keys on the display. If you make an input error, select Clear and enter the Password again.

(2)For confirmation, enter the same password as step 5 again and then select Confirm. (3)Select Close.
The display returns to the Create/Change Folder screen.

Server

When specifying Remote Link Folder:


When this machine is connected to a network, you can specify whether to copy a file to a link folder (Nos. 31 to 36) at the same time of saving or reprinting a file. Specify this option if necessary. A copied file will be saved in the shared folder in the linked machine (No. 30).

(1)Specify a folder to set as a remote link folder, and then select Select Folder.
You can select multiple folders.

The Auto Remote Copying Setup screen appears.

196

6.2 Setting Folders

(2)Select On, and then Save continuously until the display returns to the Create/Change Folder screen.
If a folder with no link folder is specified, you cannot select On. Set the link folder first. For the setting procedure, see 6.2.4 Setting Link Folder/FTP Folder.

5 6

Select Save.
The display returns to the Create/Change Folder (Copy Files) screen. Auto Duplication will be displayed for the selected folder.

To finish the settings, select Save or Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

197

Server

6.2 Setting Folders

6.2.3

Setting Shared Folder

The following procedure explains how to set the shared folder (No.30). If the shared folder is set, the file stored in the folder can be accessed from network-connected machines.
All files transferred from the linked machine are saved in the shared folder.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen appears.

2
Server

Select Create/Change Folder.

The Create/Change Folder (Copy File) screen appears.

198

6.2 Setting Folders

3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

Select folder 30 and Select Folder.

The Create/Change Folder screen appears.

Specify an item to register or change its value and select Modify.

199

Server

6.2 Setting Folders

When setting FTP Password:


You can set the FTP password to access from an external machine.

(1)Enter the FTP password and select Save.

The display returns to the Create/Change Folder screen.

With setting Auto Print:


For Auto Print, see the messages displayed on the following screen.

(1)Select On and then Save.

Server

If you select Save to File or Merge File function to save files, the machine doesnt print the file automatically.

The display returns to the Create/Change Folder screen.

When setting Auto Print Retry Interval:


For Auto Print Retry Interval, see the message displayed on the following screen.

(1)Enter the time interval by using the keypad and select Save.

200

6.2 Setting Folders

The display returns to the Create/Change Folder screen.

To finish the settings, select Save or Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

About the Auto Print function A file is automatically printed when a linked machine transfers the file to the shared folder with Auto Print feature enabled. Even if the machine is not connected to a network, you can also use the shared folder for print reservation because a non-output file is automatically printed when the file is copied or moved to this folder. The Auto Print function prints files in the order of storage when there are no jobs in progress. If a non-output job cannot be printed, the machine automatically tries to print the job again after the time set at Auto Print Retry Interval. This is repeated again and again until the file is printed. If a file transferred from the linked machine is set to OFF at Save to File, the file is automatically erased after printing. A file reprinted manually from the shared folder of this machine is also deleted.

201

Server

6.2 Setting Folders

6.2.4

Setting Link Folder/FTP Folder

The following procedure explains how to set link folders (No.31 to 36) and FTP folders (No.37 to 42). You can set the folders when your machine is linked to other machines and FTP servers via a network.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen appears.

2
Server

Select Create/Change Folder.

The Create/Change Folder (Copy File) screen appears.

202

6.2 Setting Folders

Select one of folders 31 to 42 and Select Folder.

The Create/Change Folder screen appears.

Specify an item to register or change its value and select Modify.

203

Server

6.2 Setting Folders

When setting Remote IP Address:


Set the IP address of a linked machine. Check the address with the network administrator.

(1)Enter the IP address and select Save.


"." is entered automatically every three digits.

The display returns to the Create/Change Folder screen.

When setting Remote FTP password:


Set the FTP password of a linked machine. Check the FTP password with the network administrator.

(1)Enter the FTP password and select Save.

Server

DC2101D55

The display returns to the Create/Change Folder screen.

To finish the settings, select Save or Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

204

6.2 Setting Folders

6.2.5

Setting Folder Name

The following procedure explains the procedure for setting or changing a folder name. Not Registered is displayed for a folder with no name.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen appears.

Select Create/Change Folder.

Server

The Create/Change Folder (Copy File) screen appears.

205

6.2 Setting Folders

3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

Specify a folder and then select Enter/Change Folder Name.

The Change Folder Name screen appears.

4
When entering a folder name, use keys on the Change Folder Name screen displayed. If you make an input error, press Backspace to delete one character at a time or Clear to delete all characters. When Cancel is selected, the screen closes with the name before setting or change.

Enter a folder name and then select Save.

Server

The display returns to the Change Folder Name (Copy Files) screen.

To finish the settings, select Close or Save continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

206

6.3

Saving Data
Value Description Copy files can be saved in folders.
6.2 Setting Folders

This section explains the procedure for saving scanned data.


Item Destination File name

Folders Automatic (Year, month, day, hour, minute, second)

Names are automatically assigned to copy files saved on the server. The file name assigned is actually the time when the file is saved and is in the following format:

YYYY-MM-DD

HH-MM-SS

The saved file name can be changed. For details, refer to 6.4.1 Changing File Name.

Time

Automatic (Month, day, hour, minute)

Copy files saved to the server are automatically labeled with the file save time. The save time assigned is actually the time when the file is saved and is in the following format:

MM/DD

HH:SS

Even if the saved file name is changed, the save time is still displayed.

Saved document pages

About 3,000 pages (about 1,000 pages in one file)

This is the maximum number of document pages that can be saved to the server. However, the maximum number of pages that can be saved to a single file is about 1,000.
If insufficient disk capacity is available on the server, copy files cannot be saved even if the maximum number of pages has not been reached. In this case, make more space available by deleting unnecessary files. Each side of a document page counts as a single page. Therefore, with a double-sided document, the two sides count as two pages. With the optional hard disk, up to about 6,000 pages can be saved. Contact your Customer Support Center.

Server

Number of files saved

250 (each folder) 1,000 (each folder)

This is the maximum number of files that can be saved in a folder. When using the server, maximum of 250 files can be saved in each folder. This is the maximum number of files that can be saved in a FTP folder. Maximum of 1,000 files can be saved in each folder.

207

6.3 Saving Data

6.3.1

Saving Data

To save data scanned from documents, switch to the server functions by selecting either Save to File or Copy and Save.
The settings of number of copies and Sample Set are not saved.

Saving data in folder


Procedure

1 2 3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

Load the documents.

Select Save to File or Copy and Save.


The Folder List (Copy Files) screen appears.

Specify a folder where the file is stored and then select Select Folder.

Server
The Basic Features screen appears.
If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears.

Specify settings for other features if necessary.

208

6.3 Saving Data

5
6.2.2 Setting Storage Folders

Press Start on the control panel.


The scanning of documents will begin.

If a Remote Link Folder is set to the folder:


When you specify one of folders 1 to 29 where the remote link folder is set, the following screen appears. If multiple copy destinations are registered in the folder, you have to specify the setting for the destination each time Start is pressed.

(1)Select On to print the file automatically at the linked machine.

Server

(2)Select On to save the file at the linked machine.


If Off is selected, the file is deleted after printing.

(3)When specifying the number of prints for output at the linked machine, select Enter.
If Enter is not selected, the number of prints is changed.

(4)Enter the number of prints by using the keypad, and select Enter.
The number entered is set.

(5)Press Start.
The scanning of documents will begin. Once the copy file has been saved in an storage folder, the same file is also copied into the remote linked folder. If the Auto Print function is enabled at the shared folder, multiple machines can print the same data simultaneously. In Copy and Save mode, the machine starts to automatically transfer the file to the remote linked folder at the completion of document scanning.

209

6.3 Saving Data

During file saving, the following screen remains displayed:

When the scanning is done normally:


The files are saved in the selected folder.

When an error occurs during scanning (or scanning is paused by selecting Stop):
The operation will continue after the error is resolved. After the operation is correctly done, the data will be saved as a file. Press the C button to stop the saving of data.

Server

210

6.3 Saving Data

6.3.2

Checking saved file

You can check the file properties in the list and preview a specified page of the file.

Procedure

Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears.

1 2

Select Edit/Print Files to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. Specify a folder where the file is stored and then select Select Folder.

Server

Files stored in the folder are listed.

3
Select Change File Order to sort them in alphabetical order or in order of time.

Check the file. Checking the file properties in the list:


Data scanned from documents are displayed as files. The latest saved file is displayed at the top of the list.

211

6.3 Saving Data

Checking the preview image of a specified page


You can check the preview image of a specified page saved in a storage folder (No. 1 to 29) or the shared folder (No. 30).

(1)Specify a folder, and select Merge/Edit Files.

The Merge/Edit Files screen appears.

(2)Select Edit Pages.

Server
The Edit Pages screen appears.

212

6.3 Saving Data

(3) Enter the page number, and select Save.

The preview image of the specified page appears.

(4)Select Rotate 90 to the left, Rotate 90 to the right or Zoom In if necessary.


A stamp image that was selected in the Annotation feature cannot be displayed.

Server
If selecting Rotate 90 to the left or Rotate 90 to the right, the displayed image is rotated counterclockwise or clockwise, respectively. If selecting Zoom In, the displayed image is enlarged 4 times with the center of the image. The image returns to the original size if Show All is selected.

Select Copy to return to the Copy screen.

213

6.4

Editing Files

This section explains how to edit files stored in the server. You can rename, delete, or merge files, and make settings to attach covers, insert separators, sort or staple copies, and punch holes.

6.4.1

Changing File Name

You can change the file name stored in a storage folder (No. 1 to 29) or the shared folder (No. 30).
Files stored in a link folder (No. 31 to 36) or FTP folder (No. 37 to 42) cannot be renamed.

Procedure

1 2
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears.

Select Edit/Print Files to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. Specify a folder where the file is stored and then select Select Folder.

Server

Files stored in the folder are listed.

214

6.4 Editing Files

3
Select only one copy file for changing name. When multiple copy files are selected, the file names cannot be changed.

Specify a file to change its name and then select Change File Name.

The Change File Name screen appears.

4
To enter the file name, use the keys displayed on the Change File Name screen. If you made a mistake while entering the name, press the Backspace button once to clear one character. Selecting Cancel will close the Change File Name screen without changing the file name.

Enter the file name and then select Save.

Server

For new file name:


The display will return to the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen for the Edit/Print Files mode, and the file name will be changed.

For file name that is in use:


When there is an existing file with the newly saved file name, the Check File screen appears. To overwrite the existing file, select Overwrite. To change to another file name, select Redo.

215

6.4 Editing Files

6.4.2

Deleting Files

You can delete files stored in a storage folder (No. 1 to 29) , the shared folder (No. 30), or a FTP folder (No. 37 to 42).
You can restore the deleted files. You cannot delete files stored in a link folder (No. 31 to 36).

Procedure

Select Edit/Print Files to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. When deleting a file stored in a folder: (1)Check that the Hard Disk (Copy File) is displayed. (2)Specify a folder where the file is stored and then select Select Folder.

Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears.

Files stored in the folder are listed.

Server

216

6.4 Editing Files

(3)Select the required file and then select Delete File(s).

The Delete File(s) screen appears.

Select Delete.

Server

Selecting Cancel will close the Delete File(s) screen without deleting the copy files. The number of copy files selected will appear in the Delete File(s) screen.

The selected files will be deleted.

217

6.4 Editing Files

6.4.3

Merging Files

You can merge multiple files that are stored in the same folder to create a new file. The merged file can be merged with another merged file or Build Job file. When multiple files are selected, they will be merged for printing in the order of selection.
Once merged, copy files cannot be divided. Files in link folders (No. 31 to 36) and FTP folders (No.37 to 42) cannot be edited. Files cannot be merged if the number of files to be merged in a folder exceeds 250. Copy files that have been programmed with the Transparency, Booklet Creation, or Tab Copying feature cannot be merged with other copy files. Files that are saved with similar settings for paper supply but different settings for paper size/type cannot be merged. For example, files with settings of A3 paper in tray 2 and B4 paper in tray 2 cannot be merged. The files cannot be merged if the folding sizes set in the files are different. If the files cannot be merged, different output trays may be set for them. Check the output tray of the files as it varies depending on the features enabled.

Procedure

1 2
Server
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears.

Select Edit/Print Files to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. Specify a folder where the file is stored and then select Select Folder.

The order of the copy files selected is displayed in Order. To deselect a selection, select it again. When any copy file in the middle of the order is deleted, the copy files following the deleted file in the order will move up the order. To check the copying settings of copy files displayed in the list, press the Review button on the main control panel. For details, refer to 4.2.2 Checking Settings.

Files stored in the folder are listed.

Select the files that you want to merge in the order that they are to be printed, and then select Merge/Edit Files.

218

6.4 Editing Files

The Merge/Edit Files screen appears.

Select Merge/Edit Files.

Server

The Merge/Edit Files screen appears.

5
Select Previous Screen if you want to return to the previous screen and reconfirm the copy files to be merged.

If necessary, specify settings for Annotation, Covers, Separators, and Output/Finishing.

219

6.4 Editing Files

When adding annotation:


5.28 Copying with Stamp or Date

You can add annotation to a selected or merged file. Select Stamp, Date, Page Numbering or Set Numbering. If annotation has already been set to the original file, the initial annotation setting will be cancelled.

When adding covers:


5.26 Copying With Covers

You can add covers to a selected or merged file. If multiple files are selected, covers are added to the merged file. For a file selected here, nothing can be copied onto the front or back cover. The number of covers can be set from 1 to 99 as required.

When inserting separators:


You can insert separators. When multiple files are merged, blank paper is inserted between files. Separator insertion can be set only when multiple files are selected. If necessary, insert separators here because separators cannot be inserted into a merged file. For a file selected here, nothing can be copied onto the separators. The number of separators can be set from 1 to 99 as required.

5.23 Inserting Transparency Separators

When specifying Output/Finishing:


This does not change the setting of stapling/punching made at saving in the server. When checking the setting of stapling/punching at file saving in the server, select only one file on the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen and press Review.

Specify whether using the stapling/punching setting defined during saving files to the server. Select On to enable the setting.

Server

If multiple files are selected, stapling or punching is performed based on the selected staple/punch positions of the first file. If the Y-direction length of paper is different, stapling or punching is not performed. If the staple/punch positions have not been previously specified for all files, they cannot be merged and the setting is cleared.

Select Previous Screen if you want to return to the previous screen and reconfirm the copy files to be merged. Separators is not displayed if only one copy file has been selected.

Select Next.
The example used in this explanation assumes that Annotation, Covers, Separators, and the Output/Finishing are not selected in Step 5.

220

6.4 Editing Files

The Merge Files screen is displayed.

7
To specify settings for Covers, Separators, and Finishing, select Previous Screen.

Select Merge (Del Source) or Merge (Keep Source).


When Merge (Del Source) is selected, the files selected from the list for merging are deleted and a new file is merged. When Merge (Keep Source) is selected, a new file is merged without deleting the files selected from the list.

Server

The merging of the selected files begins.


Select Cancel Job to cancel the merging of copy files that are being merged. A name will be automatically added to the merged copy file.

The name of the merged file is displayed on the screen.

221

6.4 Editing Files

After the merging is completed, the display returns to the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. The merged files will become a new file and displayed at the top of the list.

Server

222

6.4 Editing Files

6.4.4

Deleting Pages/Inserting File

You can delete or insert a specified page in a file stored in a storage folder (Nos. 1 to 29) or shared folder (No. 30). Delete Page
You can delete a specified page.

Insert File
You can insert a file after the specified page of another file. Only a file in the same folder can be inserted. The entire file is inserted.
You cannot delete a page of a file with Booklet Creation enabled. A file with Tab Copying or Booklet Creation enabled cannot be inserted. A file with Transparency enabled cannot be inserted in a file with this feature disabled, and vice versa. Files with different output orientations and output trays cannot be inserted in each other. A file with Folding enabled cannot be inserted in another file with this feature disabled, and vice versa. Files with different folding types and sizes specified cannot be inserted in each other. Files with different stapled/punched settings cannot be inserted in each other. Files with different direction lengths cannot be inserted into each other. Files using the same paper tray but specifying different paper sizes and types cannot be inserted into each other. A file cannot be inserted into itself. A file exceeding 3,000 pages cannot be inserted.

Procedure

1 2
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears.

Server

Select Edit/Print Files to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. Specify a folder where the file is stored and then select Select Folder.

Files stored in the folder are listed.

223

6.4 Editing Files

3
If selecting multiple files, you

Select the files that you want to merge in the order that they are to be printed, and then select Merge/Edit Files.

cannot delete or insert pages.

The Merge/Edit Files screen appears.

Select Edit Pages.

Server
The Show/Edit Page screen appears.

5
A blank page is not included in

Enter the page number, and select Save.

the page numbering.

224

6.4 Editing Files

The preview image of the specified page appears.

Select Delete Page or Insert File.

When deleting a page:


You can delete a specified page.

(1)Select Delete Page.


The Delete Page screen appears.

(2)After checking the page number, select Delete.

Server

If you delete the page of a two-

sided copy file, both sides of the copy are deleted.


A file containing only blank

pages as a result of the page deletion is automatically deleted.

225

6.4 Editing Files

When inserting a file:


You can insert a file after the specified page. Only a file in the same folder can be inserted.

(1) Select Insert File.


The Insert File screen appears.

(2) After checking the page number, select Confirm.

(3) Select a file, and Insert.


When a page is inserted in a twosided copy file, the page is inserted after the side 2 of the page. If you select a file with Annotation enabled in Step 3, Annotation will be also enabled for the file to be inserted. You cannot make a new file that exceeds the maximum number of pages (3,000 pages) by inserting a file.

Server

The file is inserted after the specified page.

Select Copy mode to return to the Copy screen.

226

6.5

Copying and Moving Files

This section explains how to copy or move files stored in a folder to another folder.

6.5.1

Copying or Moving Files to a Folder

The following procedure explains how to copy and move files stored in a folder to another folder.

Copying or moving files from a folder


Files are copied or moved from a storage folder (No. 1 to 29).
Link folders (No. 31 to 36) and FTP folders (No. 37 to 42) are displayed if either the IP address or the FTP password is set. You cannot move a file from a link folder (No. 31 to 36). You cannot copy or move a file in a storage folder (Nos. 1 to 29), shared folder (No. 30), link folder (No. 31 to 36), or FTP folder (No. 37 to 42) to the same folder containing the source file.

Procedure

1 2
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears.

Select Edit/Print Files to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. Specify a folder where the file is saved and then select Select Folder.

Server

Files stored in the folder are listed.

227

6.5 Copying and Moving Files

Specify a file to copy or move and then select Copy/Move Files.

The Copy/Move File screen appears.

Select Hard Disk.

Server
The Folder List (Copy File) screen appears.

228

6.5 Copying and Moving Files

Specify a folder and select Start or Move.

When selecting the shared folder (No.30):


When the Auto Print function is enabled at the shared folder, the following screen appears.

Server
Specify settings if necessary. When performing Auto Print, select On at Auto Print. When deleting the file after printing, select On at Save to File. When setting the number of prints, select Enter, enter the number of prints by using keypad, and then select Enter again. If the Auto Print function is enabled at the shared folder, multiple machines can print the same data simultaneously.

229

6.5 Copying and Moving Files

When selecting one of link folders (No.31 to 36):


The following screen appears.

Specify settings if necessary. When performing Auto Print, select On at Save to File at Remote Machine. When deleting the file after printing, select On at Save to File at Remote Machine. When setting the number of prints, select Enter, enter the number of prints by using keypad, and then select Enter again. If the Auto Print function is enabled at the shared folder, multiple machines can print the same data simultaneously.

If the free space on the hard

Press Start.
File copying or moving starts. When there is an existing file with the newly saved file name, the file cannot be copied or moved. Follow the displayed instructions. If a file with the same name already exists in link folders (No. 31 to 36), this machine automatically adds a child number to the file name and transfers the renamed file.

Server

disk of the linked machine is insufficient or an network error occurs while transferring a file, an access error message appears.

230

6.5 Copying and Moving Files

About the Auto Print feature set for the shared folder (No. 30) If the Auto Print feature is set for a shared folder, files that are copied or moved to this folder are automatically printed in the order of storage. Refer to 6.2.3 Setting Shared Folder for the Auto Print feature. About the Auto Send feature set for a link folder (No. 31 to 36) Files that are copied or moved to a link folder are automatically transferred to the linked machine and will be printed in the order of storage if the Auto Print feature is set for the folder. You can also copy or move files to a link folder (Nos. 31 to 36) in the following two ways:
By copying or moving the file to a storage folder (Nos. 1 to 29) for which the file-copy-link-folder is set. After the file is saved in the storage folder, it is copied (automatically sent) to the linked folder. By reprinting the file stored in a storage folder (Nos. 1 to 29) for which the file-copy-link-folder is set. When reprinting, the file is copied (automatically sent) to the linked folder.

Refer to 6.2.2 Setting Storage Folders for setting the file-copy-link-folder.

231

Server

6.6

Printing Files

This section explains how to print files saved in the folder. A file is printed according to the settings saved. When multiple files are selected, they are printed in the order of selection. If multiple file-copy-link-folders are specified in the folder where a file is saved, you can specify whether to automatically print and save files at the remote machines. A file in a link folder (No.31 to 36) is printed according to the settings of the linked machine.
For the settings of file-copy-link-folder, see 6.2.2 Setting Storage Folders. If multiple files are selected, the features set on the File Print screen are applied to all the selected files.

Procedure

1 2
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. If the folder has a Password, the Password Entry screen appears. If you print a file with Auto selected for Paper Supply, this machine automatically selects the paper with the same size and orientation that was originally selected when the file was saved.

Select Edit/Print Files to display the Hard Disk (Copy File) screen. Select file(s) to be printed. When printing file(s) in the folder: (1)Specify a folder where the file is saved and then select Select Folder.

Server

Files stored in the folder are listed.

232

6.6 Printing Files

(2)Select file(s) to be printed.

When the finisher is installed, merged copy files are output to the finisher tray as they are printed. However, if a copy file includes transparency separators or other pages that cannot be output to the finisher tray, it is automatically output to the output tray.

3 4

Using the keypad, enter the number of copies desired and then press Start on the control panel.
The Print File screen appears.

Select the print type as required.


The setting here has higher priority than that at file saving, but is not saved.

Server

The setting for stapling or punching specifies a position on output paper. Set the position to a file that is output with the face down. To check the document image position after priority stapling or punching, it is recommended to check the results by Print First Page.

When stapling/punching:
You can set stapling or punching. If the selected file has been programmed with the stapling or punching feature, this setting has priority over the stapling/ punching settings set at the file level

(1)Select Add Finishing.


If the files has been programmed with the Folding or Booklet Creation feature, you cannot select Add Finishing.

The Add Finishing screen appears.

(2)Select a stapling or punching position.


For punch, only single position (portrait direction) can be specified.

233

6.6 Printing Files

(3)Select Save.
The display returns to the Print File screen.

When setting Output Orientation:


You can set the output orientation of the copies. Options are Auto, Face Up, and Face Up Reverse Order. If Stapled/Punched or Booklet Creation is set to On, only Auto can be selected for Output Orientation. If Transp Separators is set to On, Reverse Order. cannot be selected. You cannot set Output Orientation if Tab Copying, Folding, or Z Fold has already set for files.

When setting 2 Sided:


You can set the option for either one-sided or two-sided printing of a file. Options are Auto, One-Sided, and Two-Sided. You cannot set 2 Sided if Transp Separators, Tab Copying, Booklet Creation, Book Duplex, or Folding has already set for files.

Server

When setting Paper Supply:


You can specify the paper tray for printing. Only the tray with the same orientation and size can be selected. Options are Auto, Tray 1 to Tray 4. Tray 6 is available only when the tray 6 (optional) is installed.

5
If you have selected multiple files, Print First Page is unavailable.

Select Print First Page if necessary.


You can print only the first page as a sample to check the print file contents and the print result. This sample printing does not affect the number of copies. When Add Finishing is selected, it is recommended to check the print result. The first page of the selected file is printed. If there is no image for the first sheet of a document due to covers or transparency separators, the first page having an image is automatically searched and printed. For a file where stapling is set, the first two pages having images are printed and stapled. After printing, the display returns to the Print File screen.

Even if multiple files are selected, the Auto Send feature is applied to all the files selected only once.

Press Start or select Start Printing.


File printing starts.

If the remote link folder is set:

234

6.6 Printing Files

If reprinting is executed by specifying a folder (No.1 to 29) where the remote link folder is registered, the File Copy Target Folder screen appears.

(1)For automatic printing at the linked machine, select On at Auto Print at Remote Machine. (2)For file saving at the linked machine, select On at Save to File at Remote Machine. (3)When setting the number of prints, select Enter. (4)Enter the number of copies by using the keypad. (5)Select Enter again.

Server

The number of copies is programmed.

(6)Select Save.
The display returns to the Print File screen.

(7)Press Start or select Start Printing.


If you press the Job Status button and select Delete Job while printing multiple files, the printing of all the selected files will be canceled. Refer to "4.1.4 Checking Job Status" for the Job Status button.

If multiple remote link folders are registered, the File Copy Target Folder screens are displayed sequentially each time the Start is pressed or Start Printing is selected. When all the settings are finished, file printing starts. If the Auto Print feature is set to the respective shared folders of the linked machines, you can simultaneously print the file from multiple machines connected to the network using the Auto Send feature.

235

6.6 Printing Files

Reprinting a file with the Set Numbering setting: If the network-connected machine reprints a file with the Set Numbering setting and requests to print the file at the remote machines that have been programmed with the Auto Print feature, sequential numbers are automatically given to all the files to be printed. For example, the file to be printed at Machine A is numbered 1 in the background and the files to be printed at Machines B and C are sequentially numbered 2 and 3.

Machine A

Machine B

Report

Report

Machine C

Report

Server

236

7 Scanning
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 About Scanning................................................................238 Mailbox Settings...............................................................239 Scanning Documents ......................................................263 Installing the Scanner Driver ..........................................276 Downloading Scanned Data............................................281

7.1

About Scanning

This section explains the scanning function. Scanned document data is saved as a file in the Mailbox. You can download files saved in the Mailbox by connecting to the Mailbox from a client computer connected to the network. If the Auto Send function for scanned file is set to the mailbox, a scanned file can be transferred to a specified FTP server or sent by e-mail. You can select from Multi-page TIFF, Multi-page TIFF (JPEG), or Multi-page TIFF (G3MH), Single-page TIFF, Single-page TIFF (JPEG), Single-page TIFF (G3MH), PDF, PDFF (JPEG), PDF (G3MH) as the file format when saving files. A document of multiple pages are saved as a single file. Specify Density, Resolution, File Format, and Color Gradation when saving.
This Machine Scan

Save

Mailbox

Network

Scanning

Download E-Mail

Via FTP

FTP Server Client Computer

For details on downloading scanned data, refer to 7.5 Downloading Scanned Data. When Scan is selected, you cannot do Interrupt copying. In this manual, scanned data is referred to as a scan file. It is also referred to as a file in the procedure explanations. For details about sending by e-mail and via FTP, see 7.2.5 Sending Scanned Files Automatically.

238

7.2

Mailbox Settings

This section explains the procedures for setting mailboxes.

Assigning a Password Setting the Mailbox Name Displaying the File Name Entry Screen Setting a Mailbox as the SMB Shared Folder Sending Scanned Files Automatically

7.2.1

Assigning a Password to the Mailbox

The following procedure explains how to set or change a mailbox password. Set a password when necessary. Passwords are set as numbers of up to 4 digits using the numerals 0 to 9.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

Scanning

Select Check/Change Mailbox.

The Create Mailbox (Scan File) screen appears.

239

7.2 Mailbox Settings

3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the operator panel and press Start to search the folder

Specify a mailbox and select Select Mailbox.


When setting a new password, select a non-registered mailbox. When changing an existing password, select the corresponding mailbox.

The Create/Change Mailbox screen appears.

Select Password and then Modify.

Scanning
The Enter/Change Password screen appears.

240

7.2 Mailbox Settings

The password you enter is displayed as a series of * (asterisks). If you enter the wrong number, select Clear and retype the number.

Type in the password you want to set and select Confirm.


To enter the password, use the number buttons displayed on the display. The numbers used as passwords must consist of 4 digits.

6 7

For confirmation, retype the password you entered in step 5 and select Confirm.

To finish the settings, select Close or Save continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

241

Scanning

7.2 Mailbox Settings

7.2.2

Setting the Mailbox Name

The following procedure explains how to set or change a mailbox name. Not Registered is displayed for a mailbox with no name.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

Select Create/Change Mailbox.

Scanning
The Create Mailbox (Scan File) screen appears.

242

7.2 Mailbox Settings

3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder. Do not select more than one Mailbox. When multiple Mailboxes are selected, the box names cannot be set.

Select the Mailbox whose name you want to set, then select Enter/Change Mailbox Name.

The Change Mailbox Name screen is displayed. However, when a password is set for the Mailbox and you select Enter/Change Mailbox Name, the screen for entering the password is displayed. Type in the set password, and proceed to step 4.

4
If you made a mistake while entering the name, press the Backspace button once to clear one character or the Clear button to clear all the characters. If Cancel is selected, the Change Mailbox Name screen closes with the name before setting or change. If a user is connected to the mailbox from a client computer, you cannot set or change the name of a mailbox. After waiting a moment, retry the operation.

Type in the box name and select Save.


When entering a box name, use the keys displayed.

Scanning
When you return to the Mailbox List (Scan File) screen in Scan mode, you can see the box name you set.

243

7.2 Mailbox Settings

7.2.3

Displaying the File Name Entry Screen

Once you set the machine to display the File Name Entry screen, you can save data after entering a file name. After specifying the scanner parameter and pressing Start, the File Name Entry screen is displayed to enter a file name.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

2
Scanning

Select Create/Change Mailbox.

The Create Mailbox (Scan File) screen appears.

244

7.2 Mailbox Settings

3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

Specify a mailbox and select Select Mailbox.

The Create/Change Mailbox screen appears.

4
Enter File Name is displayed on the next page after selecting Next.

Select Enter File Name Entry Screen and then Modify.

Scanning

The File Name Entry screen appears.

245

7.2 Mailbox Settings

5
If Off is set, a name consisting of date and time is automatically assigned to the file.

Select On and then Save.

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

To finish the settings, select Save or Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

Scanning

246

7.2 Mailbox Settings

7.2.4

Setting a Mailbox as the SMB Shared Folder

If you set a mailbox as the SMB shared folder, you can directly access the mailbox from the client computer using the folder sharing feature. Client computers can manage files such as moving, copying, deleting, renaming files, and changing properties of files.

Refer to 7.5.3 Accessing SMB Shared Folder for downloading files from the SMB shared folder.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

Select Create/Change Mailbox.

Scanning

The Create Mailbox (Scan File) screen appears.

Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

Specify a mailbox and select Select Mailbox.

247

7.2 Mailbox Settings

The Create/Change Mailbox screen appears.

Select SMB Sharing and then Modify.

Scanning

The SMB Sharing screen appears.

248

7.2 Mailbox Settings

Select On and then Save.

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

To finish the settings, select Save or Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

249

Scanning

7.2 Mailbox Settings

7.2.5

Sending Scanned Files Automatically

If the Auto send feature is set to a mailbox, files can be transferred automatically by E-mail or FTP.

Supported FTP server environment


Operating system for the server
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 6a) Microsoft Windows 2000 Server Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 2) Microsoft Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1)

FTP service
Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0 FTP Service The user name, password, and destination folder required for logging onto the FTP server should be specified before using the FTP service.

Scanning

250

7.2 Mailbox Settings

Setting the transfer protocol


The following procedure explains how to transfer scanned files. Confirm the FTP address, user name, password, and the destination folder of the file through your network administrator.
If Single-page TIFF is selected for File Format, all files (scanned pages) are transferred.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

Select Create/Change Mailbox.

Scanning

The Create Mailbox (Scan File) screen appears.

3
Enter a folder number by using the keypad on the control panel and press Start to search the folder.

Specify a mailbox and select Select Mailbox.

251

7.2 Mailbox Settings

The Create/Change Mailbox screen appears.

Scanning

252

7.2 Mailbox Settings

Specify Auto Send and then Modify.

The Auto Send screen appears.

Select Send as E-mail or Send via FTP, and then Save.

Scanning

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

253

7.2 Mailbox Settings

Specify the following items.

When selecting Send as E-Mail:


Specify the following items and then Modify. (1) E-mail Address (3) E-mail Comment (2) E-mail Subject (4) Maximum E-mail Size

(1)Enter an address and select Save.

Up to 60 characters can be entered.

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

(2)Enter the title and select Save.

Scanning

Up to 60 characters can be entered.

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

254

7.2 Mailbox Settings

(3)Enter comments and select Save.

Up to 60 characters can be entered.

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

(4)Set the maximum size of the file that the machine can automatically send as an E-mail. Use the keypad on the control panel and select Save.
The factory setting is 1.0MB.

Scanning

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

If only the URL is transmitted, the original file remains in the mailbox.

If the file cannot be transmitted because of the file size beyond the limit, only the e-mail with the URL where the file is stored can be transmitted.

(5)Proceed to Step 7.

255

7.2 Mailbox Settings

When selecting Send via FTP:


Specify the following item and then Modify. (1) FTP Address (3) FTP Password (2) FTP Login Name (4) FTP Path

(1)Enter the FTP address and select Save.

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

(2)Enter the login name and select Save.

Up to 20 characters can be entered.

Scanning
The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

256

7.2 Mailbox Settings

(3)Enter the destination FTP password and select Save.

Up to 20 characters can be entered.

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

(4)Enter the location and select Save.

Up to 60 characters can be entered.

Scanning

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

(5)Proceed to Step 7.

257

7.2 Mailbox Settings

Select Transmitted File and then necessary. Select Delete or Save and then Save.

Check/Change

if

The display returns to the Create/Change Mailbox screen.

To finish the settings, select Save or Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

Scanning

258

7.2 Mailbox Settings

Checking and Changing E-Mail Settings


E-Mail is transmitted via an SMTP server. The following procedure explains how to check or change the SMTP server address, port settings, the address for E-mail notification in case of a transmission failure, and the sender address. Consult your network administrator for the SMTP server address and port settings.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

Select Network Settings.

Scanning

The Network Settings screen appears.

259

7.2 Mailbox Settings

You can check the current settings.

When changing an E-Mail setting, select Modify.

Scanning

The Check/Change Network Settings screen appears.

Specify an item to change and select Modify.

260

7.2 Mailbox Settings

When setting the SMTP server address:


Enter the SMTP server address and select Save.

Up to 12 characters can be entered.

When setting the SMTP server port:


Enter the SMTP server port and select Save.

261

Scanning

7.2 Mailbox Settings

When setting the Error To address:


The Error To address indicates the address for a file transmission failure notice. Usually, it is recommended to enter the address of the machine administrator. Enter the Error To address and select Save.

Up to 60 characters can be entered. The Error To address is not essential.

When setting the From address:


The From address indicates the sender of mail. If no address is entered, DC1010Scan is indicated in the From address of Email transmitted from this machine. Usually, it is recommended to enter the address of the machine administrator. Enter the From address and select Save.

Up to 60 characters can be entered. The From address is not essential.

Scanning

To finish the settings, select Save or Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

262

7.3

Scanning Documents

This section explains how to scan a document and save it to a Mailbox on the server. This section also explains how to change file names and how to delete files.
Item Saved File name Value Saved Automatic (Year, month, day, hour, minute, second) Description A name will be automatically assigned to the file saved on the server. The file name assigned is actually the time when the file is saved and is in the following format:

YYYY-MM-DD

HH-MM-SS

The saved file name can be changed. For details, refer to 7.3.3 Changing File Name. When the display of the File Name Entry screen is set to On, the value entered for scanning is displayed. For details about the File Name Entry screen, see 7.2.3 Displaying the File Name Entry Screen.

Time

Automatic (Month, day, hour, minute)

The save time will be automatically assigned to the file saved to the server. The save time assigned is actually the time when the file is saved and is in the following format:

MM/DD

HH:SS

Even if the saved file name is changed, the save time is still displayed.

Scanning

Data volume Mailbox

2GB 300 boxes (fixed)

This is the total volume of data that can be saved as scan files on the server. 300 Mailboxes are provided on the server. You can select Mailboxes for saving scanned document data from among these.
7.2 Mailbox Settings

263

7.3 Scanning Documents

7.3.1

Scanning Documents

When you save the scanned data in a mailbox, select Scan to change the copy mode. A name will be automatically assigned to the file saved in the mailbox. Combinations of Resolution, File Format, and Color Gradation
D: Default setting A: Available N/A: Not available

File Format

Color Gradation Full Color

Resolution 100dpi A A N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A A A N/A A A N/A N/A N/A N/A 200dpi A A 300dpi A A
*

400dpi A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A

600dpi N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A N/A N/A A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A A

Not Compression

Grayscale Black/White Full Color

D
A A

A A A N/A N/A N/A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A

Multi-page TIFF, Single-page TIFF

JPEG

Grayscale Black/White Full Color

N/A N/A N/A A A A A A A N/A N/A N/A A

G3MH

Grayscale Black/White Full Color

Not Compression

Grayscale Black/White Full Color

PDF

JPEG

Grayscale Black/White Full Color

Scanning

G3MH

Grayscale Black/White

* The default setting is Multi-page TIFF. When selecting Single-page TIFF, it changes to A: Available.

The scan area starts within 1 mm of the edge of the paper. The automatically assigned file name will be in the following format: 2000-08-01_15-45-05. When Scan mode is selected, you cannot use Interrupt copying. Assign a password to the Mailbox as necessary. For details, refer to 7.2 Mailbox Settings. After you select Single-page TIFF, Single-page TIFF (JPEG), or Single-page TIFF (G3MH) to scan the document, the scanned pages are saved as a file even if you stop scanning in progress.

264

7.3 Scanning Documents

Procedure

1 2
When the Mailbox name is not set, Not registered is displayed for Mailbox Name. For details, refer to 7.2.2 Setting the Mailbox Name If you want to select a different Mailbox after selecting Select Mailbox, selecting Scan again returns display to the Mailbox list on the Mailbox List (Scan File) screen.

Select Scan mode.


The Mailbox List (Scan File) screen is displayed.

Select the Mailbox where you want to save the file, then select Select Mailbox.

The Scan screen is displayed.

3 4

Load the documents.

Specify Density, Resolution, File Format, and Color Gradation.

265

Scanning

7.3 Scanning Documents

When specifying the density:


You can specify Density when Black/White is selected for Color Gradation. If you select Full Color or Grayscale after making density settings, these settings will become invalid.

Specify the density of the data when scanning and saving. Select Auto or a density setting from the range Lightest to Darkest. When Auto is selected, the density of the document is automatically adjusted for scanning. You can select one of 7 different levels from the range Lightest to Darkest. The default setting is Normal.

When specifying the resolution:


Specify the resolution of the data when scanning and saving. Select from the range between 100 and 600 dpi. The default setting is 200 dpi.

When specifying the file format:


Specify the file format of the data when scanning and saving. Specify Multi-page TIFF (JPEG) when Full Color or Grayscale is selected for Color Gradation. Data scanned in Multi-page TIFF has a smaller file size. Use this setting when you want to compress full color documents for scanning. Use Multi-page TIFF (G3MH) for compressing black and white documents. You can specify this when Black/White is selected for Color Gradation. Use this setting when you want to compress black and white documents for scanning. Select More to specify Single-page TIFF (JPEG), Single-page TIFF (G3MH), PDF, PDF (JPEG), or PDF (G3MH). The default setting is Multi-page TIFF.

When specifying the color gradation:


When you change Black/White to Full Color or Grayscale, Halftone or Photo for Original Type is automatically set on the Others screen.

When Full Color is selected, the document will be scanned in full color. Colors can be finely reproduced in fine gradations. When Grayscale is selected, the document will be scanned in grayscale. Using different density for black and white, this option can show fine gradations of black and white. This option is suitable for shades that cannot be represented with black and white. When Black/White is selected, the document will be scanned in black and white. The default setting is Black/White.

Scanning

266

7.3 Scanning Documents

Specify other settings if necessary.

When specifying 2 Sided Original:


When using the DADF to scan 2-sided documents, select the orientation of the document. Select 2 Sided Head to Head if the images of the document for both side one and two are in the same orientation. Select 2 Sided Head to Toe if the orientation for the images on side one and two are in different orientations.

When specifying Reduce/Enlarge:


5.2 Enlarging/Reducing Image

Use this option to select a percentage (%) to enlarge or reduce your scanned image. To specify this percentage, either select a preset percentage and scan the document, or enter the desired percentage and scan the document. Select Preset % if you want to specify one of the 7 preset percentages (fixed size to fixed size enlargement or reduction) when scanning your document. Select Variable % if you want to scan your document at a desired percentage. You can select a magnification rate in 1% increments from 25 to 400%.

Scanning

When specifying Original Size:


5.12 Specifying Document Size

Use this option to specify a document size for scanning when using a nonstandard size document or when the size of the document is different from the copy paper. When specifying a non-standard document size, specify a size within 10 to 432 mm for the X direction and 10 to 297 mm for the Y direction. Load documents on the document glass when a non-standard document size is specified.

When specifying Original Type:


5.19 Specifying Document Type

Use this option to select from one of the Original Type options to match your document type. Select Text & Photo if the document contains both text and photographs. Further define your document type by selecting from the options displayed on the right: Halftone, Photograph, and Light Text. Select Text if the document contains only text. Select Photo for scanning photographs. Further define your document type by selecting from the options displayed on the right: Halftone and Photograph.

267

7.3 Scanning Documents

When specifying High Document Volume:


5.9 Loading Documents in Batches

Use this option to make settings for the next document before you start scanning, and scan it using previously made settings. When On is selected, scanning starts as in step 6, and once the document is finished scanning, the screen prompting you to load the next document is displayed. Load the next document for scanning and press Start. When the document is finished scanning, select End Job.

When specifying Mixed Size Originals:


5.15 Copying Mixed Size Originals

Use this option when you want to load documents of various sizes in the DADF and scan them all at once. If On is selected in High Document Volume, you can load the documents on the document glass.

Press Start.
The document is scanned and saved as a file. When On is selected in High Document Volume, scanning starts, then the screen prompting you to load the next document is displayed once document scanning is completed. Load the next document for scanning, and press Start. When document scanning is completed, select End Job.

When the File Name Entry screen is displayed:


When On is selected for File Name Entry in mailbox settings, the screen appears. For details, see 7.2.3 Displaying the File Name Entry Screen.

Scanning

268

7.3 Scanning Documents

7.3.2

Checking Saved Files

Files are saved in the previously selected Mailbox. When a password is set for the Mailbox, you must enter the password for that box.

Procedure

1 2

Select Scan mode.


The Mailbox List (Scan File) screen is displayed.

Select the Mailbox where the file is saved, then select Check Files.

The Password Entry screen is displayed. If the mailbox has no password, a file list is displayed.

Scanning

3
When no password is set for the Mailbox, the Password Entry screen is not displayed. If the Scan Auditron Administrator Password is set, you can enter this password instead of the mailbox password to access a file in the mailbox. Refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode for setting the Scan Auditron Administrator Password.

Type in the password registered for that Mailbox, and select Enter.

The files saved in the Mailbox are displayed.

269

7.3 Scanning Documents

4
Files saved in a Mailbox can be downloaded to the client computer. For details, refer to 7.5 Downloading Scanned Data.

Check the contents of the saved file.

Scanning

270

7.3 Scanning Documents

7.3.3

Changing File Name

The following procedure explains how to change the name of the saved file in a mailbox. Select only one scan file to change its name.

Procedure

1 2

Select Scan mode.


The Mailbox List (Scan File) screen is displayed.

Select the Mailbox where the file is saved, then select Check Files.

Scanning

The Password Entry screen is displayed.

When no password is set for the Mailbox, the screen for entering the password is not displayed.

3 4

Type in the password registered for that Mailbox, and select Enter.
The files saved in the Mailbox are displayed.

Select the file whose name you want to change, then select Change File Name.

271

7.3 Scanning Documents

The Change File Name screen is displayed.

5
To enter the file name, use the keys displayed on the Change File Name screen. If you made a mistake while entering the name, press the Backspace button once to clear one character or the Clear button to clear all the characters. If a user is connected to the file from a client computer, the file name cannot be changed. After waiting a moment, retry the operation.

Type in the file name and select Save.

Scanning
For a new file name:
The display will return to the Mailbox (Scan File) screen in Scan mode. Specify the mailbox where scan files are stored and select Check Files to see that the file name you set is displayed.

272

7.3 Scanning Documents

For a file name that is in use:


When there is an existing file with the newly saved file name, the Check File screen appears.

To overwrite the file, select Overwrite. To change to another file name, select Redo.

273

Scanning

7.3 Scanning Documents

7.3.4

Deleting Files

The following procedure explains how to delete saved files in a Mailbox.


You cannot delete a mailbox.

Procedure

1 2

Select Scan mode.


The Mailbox List (Scan File) screen is displayed.

Select the Mailbox where the file is saved, then select Check Files.

Scanning
When no password is set for the Mailbox, the screen for entering the password is not displayed.

The Password Entry screen is displayed.

Type in the password registered for that Mailbox, and select Enter.
The files saved in the Mailbox are displayed.

274

7.3 Scanning Documents

Select the required file, then select Delete File(s).

The Delete File(s) screen is displayed.

Files deleted from Mailboxes cannot be retrieved.

Select Delete.

Selecting Cancel will close the Delete File(s) screen without deleting the files. The number of files selected will appear in the Delete File(s) screen.

Scanning

The selected files are deleted from the Mailbox.

275

7.4

Installing the Scanner Driver

This product is designated as 2101 in all markets except for those served by Fuji Xerox (FX) and FX Asian Pacific (FXAP). In FX and FXAP, the product designation is 1015S. This section explains how to install the software that is required to download files saved in a Mailbox to a client computer. When using application software on the client computer to connect to the Mailbox, the network scanner driver must be installed.
You can download files by FTP with a Web browser or a common FTP tool. For details, refer to 7.5.1 Downloading files with a Web browser and 7.5.2 Downloading files Using FTP

7.4.1

About the Operating Environment

The following describes the operating environments that are required to download files saved in a Mailbox.

Supported operating systems:


Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (Service Pack 4 or later)

Necessary system environment


CPU : PC/AT compatible with Pentium 100 MHz or higher Memory : 32 MByte or more

Scanning

276

7.4 Installing the Scanner Driver

7.4.2

Installing the Scanner Driver

The following explains how to install the scanner driver on a client computer.

Procedure

X is the name of the CD-ROM drive. Y is the version number for the scanner driver.

1 2 3 4

Insert the installation CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.

Open X:\ FX1010S_Scan-YYY\ Disk1.

In Disk1, double-click the Setup.exe icon.


The installation wizard starts and the InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.

Select Next.

Scanning

The dialog box for entering user information appears.

277

7.4 Installing the Scanner Driver

Enter your User Name and Company Name.

Select Next.
Installation starts.

Scanning

278

7.4 Installing the Scanner Driver

When installation is completed, select Finish.

Installation is completed. The scanner driver is installed in the following location.


Z is the name of the drive.

Z:\Windows\twain.32\FX1010S_Scan\

279

Scanning

7.4 Installing the Scanner Driver

7.4.3

Uninstalling the Scanner Driver

The following procedure explains how to uninstall (delete) the scanner driver.

Procedure

Click My Computer > Control Panel > Add/Remove Programs.


The Add/Remove Programs Properties dialog box appears.

Scanning

Select DocuCentre1010S Scanner Driver and click Add/ Remove.


Your computer prepares to uninstall the driver, and after a moment the Confirm File Deletion dialog box appears.

3 4

In the Confirm File Deletion dialog box, select OK.


Uninstallation starts.

When uninstallation is completed, select Finish.


Uninstallation is completed.

280

7.5

Downloading Scanned Data

Scanned document data is saved in the previously selected Mailbox when scanning starts. You can download files saved in the Mailbox by connecting to the Mailbox from a client computer connected to the network. When a password is set in the Mailbox, you can check the scanned file by entering the password. This section explains how to download files saved in a Mailbox to a client computer. To connect to the Mailbox, use FTP with a Web browser, a common FTP tool, or an SMB file sharing operating system.

281

Scanning

7.5 Downloading Scanned Data

7.5.1

Downloading files with a Web browser

You can download scanned files saved in a Mailbox using FTP via a Web browser.

Supported browsers
You can use the following Web browsers: For Windows
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later Netscape Communicator 4.6 or later

For Macintosh
Internet Explorer 4.5 or later Netscape Communicator 4.5 or later

Downloading with a Web browser


The section explains how to download scanned files with a Web browser. URL
Specify a URL in the following format. ftp://Confidential_ID_box_number@IP_address Example: When the Mailbox No. is 001 and the server's IP address is 123.223.123.223, specify the following:

ftp://001@123.223.123.223

Scanning

282

7.5 Downloading Scanned Data

Passwords
When accessing the server, you must enter the password registered for the Mailbox. Example: When the Mailbox No. is 001 and a password is registered for the Mailbox, enter the password as follows:

If the Scan Auditron Administrator Password is set, you can enter this password instead of the mailbox password to access a file in the mailbox. Enter the user name and password (user name: scanadmi, password: the Auditron Administrator Password) to log in the position one level higher than mailboxes. From there, you can access any mailbox. Refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode for setting the Scan Auditron Administrator Password.

7.5.2

Downloading files Using FTP

Scanned files saved in a Mailbox can be downloaded using a common FTP tool. When using Microsoft Internet Explorer to download scanned files, download may fail on occasion. In this case, use a common FTP tool to download the files. Log in using the following method: Login name
Enter the Mailbox No.

Scanning

Passwords
Enter the password registered for the Mailbox.
If the Scan Auditron Administrator Password is set, you can enter this password instead of the mailbox password to access a file in the mailbox. Enter the user name and password (user name: scanadmi, password: the Auditron Administrator Password) to log in the position one level higher than mailboxes. From there, you can access any mailbox. Refer to 8.2 Overview of Tools Mode for setting the Scan Auditron Administrator Password.

283

7.5 Downloading Scanned Data

7.5.3

Accessing SMB Shared Folder

If SMB Sharing is On for the mailbox, you can download a file using the folder sharing feature. You can move, copy, delete, rename files, and change the properties of files from the client computer. Log in using the following method: Login name
Enter the Mailbox No.

Passwords
Enter the password registered for the mailbox.
Do not save a file with an extension other than .pdf or .tiff in the mailbox. Do not save a read-only file in the mailbox.

Scanning

284

8 System Administrator Mode Settings


8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 System Administrator Mode ...........................................286 Overview of Tools Mode ..................................................294 Setting Tools Mode ..........................................................304 Overview of Auditron Mode ............................................308 Auditron Menu ..................................................................310 Checking Network Settings.............................................319

8.1

System Administrator Mode

This section explains how to enter or exit the System Administrator Mode. As we need to operate the control panel of the copier to enter the System Administrator Mode, the procedure on how to switch to the System Administrator Mode is also explained. There are two types of System Administrator Mode:

Tools Mode Auditron Administrator Mode

8.1.1

Using System Administrator Mode

In order to use the System Administrator Mode, we have to switch from the control panel that is normally used to the control panel of the copier. The following procedure explains how to switch to the System Administrator Mode. In this manual, the control panel that is normally used for copying is called the main control panel and the control panel used for the System Administrator Mode, copier control panel.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Main control panel

Copier control panel

Do not use the copier control panel except when specifying settings for the System Administrator Mode.

286

8.1 System Administrator Mode

Copier control panel


The names and functions of each part of the copier control panel are as follows.

With models that are equipped with the printer function (with the printer kit installed), refer to 1.2 Printer Operation Panel in the Printer manual.

No. 1 2

Name Brightness dial adjustment

Function Adjusts the brightness of the touch panel display. Turn this dial when the screen is too dark or bright. Displays the messages and feature buttons during operation. Touch the options and features on this panel to make selections. However, this is to be used only for the System Administrator Mode. Used by the system administrator when specifying specifications for copying features. When in the Auditron Administrator Mode, press this button to display the Auditron Administrator Password Entry screen. By requiring each user to enter his password, the use of this machine can be controlled. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Use the keys on this keypad to enter numeric values, like the password. Press this button to delete any numeric value wrongly entered using the keypad.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Touch panel display

3 4

System Settings/ Meter Check button Password button

5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Power Saver button Clear All button Interrupt button/indicator Stop button Start button Keypad C (Clear) button

287

8.1 System Administrator Mode

Switching to System Administrator Mode


Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

2
For details on the Auditron Administration mode, refer to 8.5 Auditron Menu.

Select System Administrator Mode.

System Administrator Mode Settings

A screen to confirm whether you want to switch control panel appears.

Select Cancel to return to the Menu screen. You can also display the screen by pressing the Stop button on the main control panel and pressing 2 on the keypad at the same time.

Select Switch.

288

8.1 System Administrator Mode

After a while, the following screen is displayed and operation is switched from the main control panel to the copier control panel.
Select Back to exit the System Administrator Mode.

Lift the cover of the copier control panel to start using the panel.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Switching to the copier control panel is complete.

8.1.2

Entering/Exiting Tools Mode

The following procedure explains how to enter or exit the Tools Mode. After switching from the main control panel to the copier control panel, you can start to use the Tools Mode. In Tools Mode, you can change the default settings of the features displayed, or change the image quality and the machine setting status. You need to enter the Tools password in order to access Tools Mode.
You cannot switch to Tools Mode if there is an error message shown on the display. Check that Ready to copy, Please wait... or the Auditron Administrator Password Entry screen is displayed. The factory setting of the Tools password is 11111. This password can be changed. For security reasons, change this password as soon as possible. For details, refer to 8.3.2 Changing Tools Password.

289

8.1 System Administrator Mode

Entering Tools Mode


Procedure

8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode

1 2

Switch to the System Administrator Mode.

Select Tools Mode.

For details on the Auditron Administration mode, refer to 8.5 Auditron Menu.

The Tools Password Entry screen is displayed.

3
The factory setting of the Tools Password is 11111. Each input digit is represented by an asterisk. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the C button to clear, and then reenter. Select Cancel to stop the operation. The display returns to the Menu screen.

Use the keypad to enter the password.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Select Confirm.
The Tools Menu screen is displayed.

290

8.1 System Administrator Mode

Exiting Tools Mode


Procedure

Select Exit on the Tools Menu screen.

Select Back on the screen displayed on the main control panel.

System Administrator Mode Settings

From the copier control panel, we will switch back to the main control panel. The copy screen or the User Password Entry screen is displayed soon.

291

8.1 System Administrator Mode

8.1.3

Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

From the Auditron Administrator Mode, you can calculate the number of copies that each account (by department/user) has made by the Auditron Administrator password entered. With the need to enter the password for copying, this would also allow you to control the use of the machine. After switching from the main control panel to the copier control panel, you can start to use the Auditron Administrator Mode. The following procedure explains how to enter or exit the System Administrator Mode.
When a copy control device, like copylyser is installed, you cannot use the Auditron Administrator Mode. You cannot switch to the Auditron Administrator Mode if there is an error message shown on the display. Check that Ready to copy, Please wait... or the Auditron Administrator Password Entry screen is displayed. The factory setting of the Tools password is 11111. This password can be changed. For security reasons, change this password as soon as possible. For details, refer to 8.5.5 Change of Password.

Entering Auditron Administrator Mode


Procedure

8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode

1 2

Switch to the System Administrator Mode.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Select Auditron Administrator Mode.

For details on the Tools mode, refer to 8.3 Setting Tools Mode.

The Auditron Administrator Password Entry screen is displayed.

The factory setting of the Auditron Administrator Password is 11111. Each input digit is represented by an asterisk. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the C button to clear, and then reenter. Select Cancel to stop the operation. The display returns to the Menu screen.

Use the keypad to enter the password.

292

8.1 System Administrator Mode

Select Confirm.
The Auditron Menu is displayed.

Exiting Auditron Administrator Mode


Procedure

From the Auditron Menu, select Exit.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Select Back displayed on the main control panel screen.

From the copier control panel, we will switch back to the main control panel. The copy screen or the User Password Entry screen is displayed soon.

293

8.2

Overview of Tools Mode

This section gives an overview of the Tools Mode. This section introduces you to the respective screens for setting and changing the features on Tools Mode, as well as the function, range of setting, and the factory setting of each feature.

Paper Tray Attributes


There are two ways to specify settings for paper tray.
Tray 6 (HCF) is optional.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Setting the paper type and color


Item Tray 1 Description Select the paper type and color for the paper to be loaded in trays 2 to 4 and the optional tray 6. Select the correct paper type to ensure that copies can be made correctly. Selecting a wrong paper type might lead to paper jam or machine breakdown.
Before you set trays 2 to 4 and tray 6 (HCF) to Heavyweight 1, you must select Disable for ATS of the respective trays on the Auto Paper / Auto Tray Switching screen.

Values Plain*: 64 less than 105 g/m2 White, Blue, Green, Yellow, Buff, Goldenrod, Other 1, Other 2 Plain*: 64 less than 105 g/m2 Heavyweight1: 105 128 g/ m2 White, Blue, Green, Yellow, Buff, Goldenrod, Other 1, Other 2
* indicates the factory setting.

Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 6 (HCF)

294

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Auto Tray Switching (ATS)


This feature allows you to specify whether to automatically switch to another tray that contains paper of the same size, orientation and type (Plain paper only) to continue copying once paper in the selected tray has run out.
Item Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 6 (HCF) Description Select the ATS setting for each of the tray. Selecting Disable for a tray will disable the ATS feature for that tray. You will find it convenient to disable the ATS feature for trays that you do not use frequently, like those for loading heavy weight paper or color paper. For trays selected with Enable, you cannot select Heavyweight 1 for their paper type settings. ATS is not available for tray 5 (bypass). Tray 6 (HCF) is an optional product. Once Enable is selected for this item, the ATS feature will be applicable to trays that are selected with Enable. If Enabled during Auto Paper is selected, the ATS feature will only be applicable if Auto is selected Paper Supply. If you have selected a specific tray and the paper runs out during copying, the tray will not be switched to another tray. Once Disable is selected for this item, the ATS feature will not be applicable to trays that are selected with Enable.
If more than one tray is enabled for this ATS feature, the order in which they will be switched is as follows: tray 6 (HCF), tray 1, tray 2, tray 3 and tray 4. Tray 6 (HCF) is an optional product.

Options Enable, Disable

Auto Tray Switching

Enable Enabled during Auto Paper* Disable

System Administrator Mode Settings

* indicates the factory setting.

Audio tones
You can set the volume of audio tones, like those which notify you of a completed copy job or a machine fault.
The volume of the options for the audio tones, Soft, Normal, Loud, can be adjusted by the volume adjustment dial on the main control panel. For details, refer to 1.3 Using the Touch Panel Display.

Item Control Panel Select Tone Control Panel Alert Tone Hard Keypad Input Tone Machine Ready Tone Copy Job Complete Tone Alert Tone

Description Specify the tone when you have selected a button on the display correctly. Specify the tone when you make an error in operation. Specify the tone when you press any button on the control panel. Specify the tone when the machine is ready to copy after the power has been switched on. Specify the tone when a copy job is completed without error. Specify the tone when a fault is detected, like a document or paper jam.

Available options Off, Soft, Normal*, Loud Off, Soft, Normal*, Loud Off*, On Off, Soft, Normal*, Loud Off, Soft, Normal*, Loud Off, Soft, Normal*, Loud
* indicates the factory setting.

295

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Timers
You can set the time needed to automatically activate the following items:
Item Job Complete Auto Clear Description Specify the time for the feature settings to return to their default values automatically after copying is completed. Available options 1 to 59 sec (in 1 sec increments), 1 to 10 min (in 1 min increments), 2 min*, Disable 1 to 59 sec (in 1 sec increments), 1 to 10 min (in 1 min increments), 2 min*, Disable 1 to 240 min (in 1 min increments), 15 min*

Job Program Auto Clear

Specify the time for the feature settings to return to their default values automatically after incomplete job settings were made.

Low Power Mode

Specify the time for the machine to automatically switch to the Low Power Mode after copying is done or some operations have been made.
1.2.2 Saving Energy

Power Saver Off Mode

Specify the time for the machine to automatically switch off the power after a copying is done or some operations have been made. This feature is not available when Power Saver Off Mode of the Others feature in Tools Mode is set to Disabled.
Enabled must be selected for Auto Power Saver Mode for the Others feature before the setting here can be specified.

15 to 240 min (in 1 min increments), 60 min*

System Administrator Mode Settings

1.2.2 Saving Energy

System Admin Mode Exit Connection Reject Connection Accept

Specify the time for the machine to automatically return to the default screen after settings have been made in Tools Mode. Set the time to accept print and scan requests after all selections of a copy job have been cleared. Set the time to accept print and scan requests before all selections of a copy job have been cleared.

10 to 60 min (in 1 min increments), 10 min*, Disable 1 to 59 sec or 1 to 10 min (in 1 sec/min increments) 1 to 59 sec or 1 to 10 min (in 1 sec/min increments)
* indicates the factory setting.

Administrator Password
You can change the Tools password for accessing the System Administration Mode. You can set a password of 4 to 12 characters. The factory setting of the password is 11111.
8.3.2 Changing Tools Password

296

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Copy Defaults
You can set the default values of the copy features. The settings of the machine will return to the default values set here when the power is switched on; when the machine recovers from the Power Saver mode; or when the Clear All button is pressed. So if you specify the settings or values of frequently used features as the default values, there is no need to change these values whenever you need to use them.
Item Paper Supply Description Specify the default value of Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen. Paper Supply cannot be set to Auto when the setting of Reduce/Enlarge is Auto%. This default value is also applicable to the Body Pages Tray of Covers on the Output Format screen. However, if you select Auto here, the default value for the Front/Back Cover Tray of Covers will be the first priority tray. (The first priority tray is usually tray 1, or the optional tray 6 (HCF) if it is installed.) Specify the default value of the tray for Covers on the Output Format screen. Specify the default value of the tray for Booklet Creation on the Output Format screen. Specify the default value of Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Features screen. Nine preset ratios are displayed there for your selection. Out of the nine ratios, three (100%, Auto%, and 50%) are fixed but you can choose to display any other six ratios from a list of 20 from R/E Presets of Tools Mode. Auto% cannot be selected here if the default value for Paper Supply is Auto. Specify the default value of Original Type on the Image Quality screen. Specify the default value of Text & Photo of Original Type. Specify the default value of Photo of Original Type. Specify the default value of Text of Original Type. Specify the default value of Lighter/Darker on the Image Quality screen. Specify the default values of the three density levels (high, medium, and low) of Density Control on the Image Quality screen. Specify the default value of Sharpness on the Image Quality screen. Specify the default values of Margin Shift (Side 1 and Side 2) on the Added Features screen. Available options Auto*, tray 1, tray 2, tray 3, tray 4, tray 6 (HCF) (optional)

Covers Booklet Creation Reduce/Enlarge

Tray 1, tray 2*, tray 3, tray 4, tray 6 (HCF) (optional), tray 7 Tray 1, tray 2*, tray 3, tray 4, tray 6 (HCF) (optional), tray 7

System Administrator Mode Settings

100%*, Auto%, 50%, 141%, 122%,115%, 86%, 81%, 70%, 25%, 35%, 64%, 78%, 97%, 127%, 129%, 154%, 180%, 200%, 220%, 282%, 400%

Original Type Text & Photo Photo Type Text Type Lighter/Darker

Text & Photo, Text*, Photo, Map Halftone*, Photograph, Light Text Halftone*, Photograph Normal Text, Pencil Text (Black) Auto*, Lightest-Normal-Darkest (7 levels) Low Density: -3 to 0* to +3 Medium Density: -3 to 0* to +3 High Density: -3 to 0* to +3 (7 levels each) Softer to Normal* to Sharper (5 levels) No Shift* Auto Center Corner Shift Variable Shift

Density Control

Sharpness Margin Shift (Side 1) Margin Shift (Side 2)

297

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Item Corner Shift (Side 1) Corner Shift (Side 2) Variable Shift (Side 1) Variable Shift (Side 2) Edge Erase

Description Specify the default values of Corner Shift (Side 1 and Side 2) of Margin Shift on the Added Features screen.

Available options Top left*, left, bottom left, bottom, Bottom right, right, top right, top Vertical Shift: 0-432 mm (0 mm*) Horizontal Shift: 0-432 mm (0 mm*) Normal* (Top & Bottom Edges: 2 mm; Left & Right Edges: 2 mm) Variable Erase (Top & Bottom Edges: 0 - 50 mm; Left & Right Edges: 0 - 50 mm) Head to Top*, Head to Left

Specify the default values of Variable Shift (Side 1 and Side 2) of Margin Shift on the Added Features screen.

Specify the default value of Edge Erase on the Added Features screen.

Original Orientation

Specify the default value of Original Orientation on the Others screen.


Labels affixed on the document glass and DADF shows Head to Top orientation. If you change the default value of Original Orientation to Head to Left, take note that you are working with a different original orientation from the labels.

System Administrator Mode Settings

5.14 Specifying Image Orientation

Output Output Orientation 2 Sided 2 Sided Originals/ Copies

Specify the default value of Output on the Basic Features screen. Specify the default value of Output Orientation on the Output Format screen. Specify the default value of 2-Sided on the Basic Features screen. Specify the default values of Originals and Copies of 2-Sided on the Basic Features screen. You cannot define different default values for Originals and Copies. Specify the default value of Multiple Up on the Output Format screen. Specify the default value of Image Order of 2 Images in Multiple Up on the Output Format screen. Select the default values of Image Order of 4 Images and 8 Images in Multiple Up on the Output Format screen. Specify the default value of High Document Volume on the Basic Features Screen. Specify the default value of the booklet cover tray. Apply annotation on all pages or specific pages. Specify the default value of Sample Set on the Basic Features Screen.

Auto, Collated, Uncollated Auto*, Face Up, Face Up Reverse Order 1 ->1 Sided*, 1 ->2 Sided, 2 t->2 Sided, 2 ->1 Sided Head to Head*, Head to Toe

Multiple Up 2 Up Image Order 4/8 Up Image Order

1 Up*, 2 Up, 4 Up, 8 Up Left ->Right/Top ->Bottom*, Right ->Left/Top ->Bottom Right then Down*, Down then Right, Left then Down, Down then Left Off*, On Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 (optional) All Pages, All Except Covers Off*, On
* indicates the factory setting.

High Document Volume Booklet CreationCovers Tray Annotation-Print Option Sample Set

298

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Screen Layout
There are two types of settings for Screen Layout.
The following settings will not be reflected: Tray Preset 1 and Tray Preset 2 of Basic Features Presets; and Relocate Features.

Basic Features Presets


You can change some of the settings that are displayed for Paper Supply and Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Features screen.
Item Tray Preset 1 Tray Preset 2 Description Among the five buttons of Paper Supply on the Basic Features screen, you can change the display of the second and third buttons. The second button is the Tray Preset 1 and the third button, Tray Preset 2. Among the seven buttons of Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Features screen, you can change the display of the fourth and fifth buttons. The fourth button is R/E Preset 1 and the fifth button, R/E Preset 2. Available options Tray 1* (Tray Preset 1), Tray 2* (Tray Preset 2), Tray 3, Tray 4, Tray 6 (HCF) (optional) 25%, 35%, 50%, 64%, 70%, 78%, 81%* (R/E Preset 1), 86%* (R/E Preset 2), 97%, 115%, 122%, 127%, 129%, 141%, 154%, 180%, 200%, 220%, 282%, 400%
* indicates the factory setting.

Reduce/Enlarge Preset 1 Reduce/Enlarge Preset 2

Relocate Features
You can replaced the features displayed at top right and second right on the Basic Features screen.
Item Basic Features screen (top right) Description You can relocate the feature at the top right of the Basic Features screen with another one. Available options Original Type*, Mixed Size Originals, Margin Shift, Multiple Up, Covers, Booklet Creation, Annotation, Repeat Image Original Type, Mixed Size Originals*, Margin Shift, Multiple Up, Covers, Booklet Creation, Annotation, Repeat Image
* indicates the factory setting.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Basic Features screen (second right)

You can relocate the feature at the second right of the Basic Features screen with another one.

299

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Reduce/Enlarge Presets
There are two types of settings for Reduce/Enlarge Presets. Reduce/Enlarge Presets
You can select the six preset ratios (besides 100%, Auto%, 50%) for Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Features screen.You can choose from 20 ratios to assign to the six buttons for Reduce/Enlarge Presets.
Item Reduce/Enlarge Preset 1 (Top left) Reduce/Enlarge Preset 2 Reduce/Enlarge Preset 3 Reduce/Enlarge Preset 4 (Top right) Reduce/Enlarge Preset 5 Reduce/Enlarge Preset 6
* indicates the factory setting.

Available options 25%, 35% (A3A6), 50% (A3A5), 64% (11178.511), 70% (A3A4 B4B5), 78% (8.5148.511), 81% (B4A4 B5A5)*, 86% (A3B4 A4B5)*, 97% (A48.511), 115% (B4A3 B5A4)*, 122% (A4B4 A5B5)*, 127% (8.513A3), 129% (8.5111117), 141% (A4A3 B5B4)*, 154% (5.58.58.514), 180%, 200% (A5A3), 220% (5.58.51117), 282% (A6A3), 400%

System Administrator Mode Settings

100% Fine-tune
You can fine-tune the value of 100% in Reduce/Enlarge on the Basic Features screen, between the range of 98.0% to 102.0% in 0.1% increments. If 100% is selected for Variable% or Independent XY%, the value you have fine-tuned will not be applicable. Even if you have fine-tuned the value, the Reduce/Enlarge display on the Basic Features screen will remain as 100%.

Original Size Defaults


You can set the document sizes to be displayed when you select Original Size on the Added Features screen. Besides the button for Auto Size Detect, you can assign document sizes to the remaining 11 buttons. It would be good to specify frequently-used non-standard sizes here so that there is no need to specify the size each time you need to use it for copying. To specify non-standard sizes, select Input, select Measurements, and then enter the values for X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) directions. The input sizes will be displayed as OOO OOO mm.

300

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

.
Item Original Size 1 (Left, 2nd from top) Original Size 2 Original Size 3 Original Size 4 (Top Center) Original Size 5 Original Size 6 Original Size 7 Original Size 8 (Top Right) Original Size 9 Original Size 10 Original Size 11
* indicates the factory setting.

Available options A and B series: A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, B5, B5 portrait, A5, A5 portrait, B6, A6, Postcard, Inch sizes: 1117, 8.514, 8.513, 8.511, 8.511 portrait, 5.58.5, 5.58.5 portrait, 810, 3.55, 46, 57, 1114 Other sizes: 8K Input Measurements: X direction (horizontal): 10-432 mm Y direction (vertical): 10-297 mm Factory settings of Original Size 1-11: A3*, B4*, A5*, A4*, A4 portrait*, B5*, B5 portrait*, 11 17*, 8.513*, 8.511*, 8.511 portrait*

Others
There are three options to specify for Others.
Item Maximum Quantity Power Saver Off Mode Size Input Units Description Specify the desired limit to restrict the number of sets that the machine can make. Specify whether the Power Saver Off Mode of Timeouts in Tools Mode is needed. Specify the default units of measurement for originals and paper sizes. Available options 1- 9,999 sheets (9,999*) Disable*, Enable Inches, Millimeters
* indicates the factory setting.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Image Quality
You can set the image quality and adjust the gradation here.
Item Text & Photo Recognition Description You can change the photo and text recognition level of the machine. If Text is selected, text, even small prints, can be recognized easily. If Photo is selected, photo images of newspapers and pamphlets can be recognized easily. Available options Text to Normal* to Photo (5 levels)

301

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Item Photo Reproduction Level

Description You can adjust the photo reproduction level of the machine when copying with Text & Photo of Original Type on the Image Quality screen. If Lower is selected, then the black color of the image will be emphasized. Select this when you want to emphasis the texts in black when copying documents with both text and photographs. If Higher is selected, problems with color mixtures that are difficult to reproduce will be resolved.

Available options Lower to Normal* to Higher (5 levels)

* indicates the factory setting.

Scan Mode Settings


There are three type of settings for scanning. Scan Defaults You can set the default value of Scan mode. The settings of the machine will return to the default values set here when the power is switched on; when the machine recovers from the Power Saver mode; or when the Clear All button is pressed. So if you specify the settings or values of frequently used features as the default values, there is no need to change these values whenever you need to use them.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Item Scan Resolution File Format

Description Specify the default value of Resolution on the Basic Features screen. Specify the default value of File Format on the Basic Features screen.

Available options 100dpi, 200dpi*, 300dpi, 400dpi, 600dpi Multi-page TIFF*, Multi-page TIFF (JPEG), Multi-page TIFF (G3MH), Single-page TIFF, Single-page TIFF (JPEG), Single-page TIFF (G3MH), PDF, PDF (JPEG), PDF (G3MH) Full Color, Gray scale, Black* Auto, Lightest to Normal* to Darkest (7 levels) Text & Photo, Text*, Photo Halftone*, Photograph, Color Copies (Light Text) Halftone*, Photograph Off*, On
* indicates the factory setting.

Color Graduation Lighter/Darker Original Type Text & Photo

Specify the default value of Color Graduation on the Basic Features screen. Specify the default value of Lighter/Darker on the Basic Features screen. Specify the default value of Original Type on the Others screen. Specify the default value of Text & Photo for Original Type. Specify the default value of Photo for Original Type. Specify the default value of High Doc Volume on the Others screen.

Photo High Document Volume

302

8.2 Overview of Tools Mode

Reduce/Enlarge Presets
You can select the six preset ratios (besides 100%, Auto%, 50%) for Reduce/Enlarge on the Others screen.You can choose from 20 ratios to assign to the six buttons for Reduce/Enlarge Presets.
Item Reduce/Enlarge Preset 1 (Top left) Reduce/Enlarge Preset 2 Reduce/Enlarge Preset 3 Reduce/Enlarge Preset 4 (Top right) Reduce/Enlarge Preset 5 Reduce/Enlarge Preset 6 Custom Preset 7
* indicates the factory setting.

Available options 25%, 35% (A3A6), 50% (A3A5), 64% (11178.511), 70% (A3A4 B4B5), 78% (8.5148.511), 81% (B4A4 B5A5)*, 86% (A3B4 A4B5)*, 97% (A48.511), 115% (B4A3 B5A4)*, 122% (A4B4 A5B5)*, 127% (8.513A3), 129% (8.5111117), 141% (A4A3 B5B4)*, 154% (5.58.58.514), 180%, 200% (A5A3), 220% (5.58.51117), 282% (A6A3), 400%

Scan Auditron Administrator password


If the Scan Auditron Administrator password is set, you can enter this password instead of the mailbox password to access a file in the mailbox. The password must be 0 - 4 digits. (1) Use the keypad to enter the password. (2) Use the keypad to enter the same password, and select Confirm. (3) Select Close.

303

System Administrator Mode Settings

8.3

Setting Tools Mode

This section explains how to specify the Tools Mode setting.

8.3.1

Changing Tools Mode Settings

The following procedure explains how to specify basic Tools Mode settings, using the default values of the features as an illustration. Use the same procedure to specify other settings not mentioned here. For information on specifying the Tools password, refer to the other procedures/sections following this.
8.3.2 Changing Tools Password

Procedure

8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode 8.1.2 Entering/Exiting Tools Mode

1 2

Display the Tools Mode screen.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Select Copy Defaults.

The Feature Defaults screen is displayed.

You can also directly select a feature by touching it on the display. Also, you can touch Previous Page or Next Page to display the previous/ next screen.

Use

to select the required feature.

304

8.3 Setting Tools Mode

Select Change Settings.

The default value screen of the selected feature is displayed. Here, we will illustrate by selecting Lighter/Darker.

Select an option, and then select Save.

System Administrator Mode Settings

The display returns to the Feature Defaults screen and the presently set value will be reflected.

6 7

Repeat Steps 3 to 5 to change the default values of other features. Select Close when you have finished with the settings.

The display returns to the Tools Menu screen.

8.1.2 Entering/Exiting Tools Mode

Select Exit to exit Tools Mode.

305

8.3 Setting Tools Mode

8.3.2

Changing Tools Password

You can change the password for accessing Tools Mode. You can enter a password between 4 to 12 digits.

Procedure

8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode 8.1.2 Entering/Exiting Tools Mode

1 2

Display the Tools Mode screen.

Select Administrator Password.

System Administrator Mode Settings

The Administrator Password screen is displayed.

3
Each input digit is represented by an asterisk. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the C button to clear, and then reenter.

Use the keypad to enter the new password.

Select Confirm.

306

8.3 Setting Tools Mode

Use the keypad to enter the same password that you have entered in Step 3.

Select Confirm.
The change of password will not be carried out if the same password is not entered for Step 3 and 6. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press Reset and proceed from Step 3 again.

System Administrator Mode Settings

8.1.2 Entering/Exiting Tools Mode

7 8

Select Close.
The display returns to the Tools Menu screen.

Select Exit to exit Tools Mode.

307

8.4

Overview of Auditron Mode

By the Auditron Administrator Mode, you can calculate the number of copies made by each account. As shown below, you can control the use of the machine as a password is needed to do copying.
When a copy control device, like copylyser is installed, you cannot use the Auditron Administrator Mode.

Switching From Password Entry Screen and Normal Screen


Switch on Power

System Administrator Mode Settings

Enter password

Press password button


Password

308

8.4 Overview of Auditron Mode

Using the Auditron Administrator Mode


To make use of the Auditron Administrator Mode features, firstly, you will need to specify settings for the account (by department/user), like user password and copy limit, on Create/Modify Accounts from Auditron Administrator Mode, and secondly, enable the mode from Auditron Setup.
8.5.2 Create/Modify Accounts 8.5.4 Auditron Setup

You will also need to enter a password to enter the Auditron Administration mode.
8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

Auditron Functions
Check Accounts
You can check the password assigned to each account, copy limit, and the current number of copies here.
8.5.1 Review Accounts

Create/Modify Accounts
You can specify password to an account (by department/user) and modify its copy limit here. Also, you can reset the copy volume of each account to zero.
8.5.2 Create/Modify Accounts

System Administrator Mode Settings

Delete/Reset Account Data


You can delete the current copy volume, password and copy limit of each account all at the same time here. The copy volume will be reset to zero and the other data will return to their default values. Also, you can delete the copy volume and copy limit all at the same time.
8.5.3 Reset Account Data

Auditron Setup Auditron Mode


You can specify to switch on or off the Auditron Mode here. If the Auditron Mode is switched on, the Auditron functions will be activated. The Password Entry screen will appear when the power of the machine is switched on or after the Auditron Administrator Mode or Meter Check screen is displayed.
8.5.4 Auditron Setup

User Password Entry Screen Timer


You can set the time for the Password Entry screen to be displayed after the last copy job is done.
8.5.4 Auditron Setup

Auditron Administrator Password


You can change the password for accessing the Auditron Administrator Mode here. You can set a password of 4 to 12 characters.
8.5.5 Change of Password

309

8.5

Auditron Menu

This section explains how to set the Auditron Menu.

8.5.1

Review Accounts

You can check the password assigned to each account, copy limit, and the current number of copies here.
You do not need to be the Auditron Administrator in order to check these data here. For details, refer to 10.7 Checking Meter.

Procedure

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

1 2

Display the Auditron Menu screen.

Select Check Accounts.

System Administrator Mode Settings

The Check Accounts screen is displayed.

Account numbers range from 100 to 2,099.

Select Key in Account Number and then enter the account number you wish to review by using the keypad. Alternatively, you can use to select the account number.

310

8.5 Auditron Menu

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

4 5 6

Select Confirm.
The password, copy limit, and current copy volume of the account appears.

Check the settings and then select Close.


The display returns to the Auditron Menu screen.

Exit from the Auditron Administration mode.

8.5.2

Create/Modify Accounts

You can specify password to an account (by department/user) and modify its copy limit here. You can also reset the copy volume of the accounts. You can register up to 2,000 accounts.
When using Auditron Administration mode to modify the copy limit for accounts (by department/user), the number of copies output will exceed the copy limit in the following conditions: When Auto, Auto (Large Output), or Collated is selected, the number of copies set is greater than one, and Start is pressed. In this case, the copy job in progress continues even if the copy limit is exceeded during copying. When Auto, Auto (Large Output), or Collated is selected, the number of copies set is greater than one, and Start is pressed. In this case, even if the copy limit is exceeded during copying, the next set is copied to the end if even one sheet of paper for copying the next set has been fed into the unit from the paper tray. When Auto, Auto (Large Output), or Collated is selected, the number of copies is set to one, multiple documents are set in the DADF and Start is pressed. In this case, if the copy limit is exceeded during copying, copying of the set documents continues. When Uncollated is selected, and you press Start. In this case, if paper is fed from the paper tray to the unit, copying of the fed sheet of paper continues even if the copy limit is exceeded during copying.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Procedure

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

1 2

Display the Auditron Menu screen.

Select Create/Modify Accounts.

The Create/Modify Accounts screen is displayed.

311

8.5 Auditron Menu

Account numbers range from 100 to 2,099.

Select Key in Account Number and then enter the account number you wish to review by using the keypad.
Alternatively, you can use

to select the account number.

4 5
System Administrator Mode Settings
You can enter a password within the range of 4 to 12 digits. Set a different password for each account (by department/user).The same password cannot be set twice.

Select Confirm.
The password, copy limit, and current copy volume of the selected account appears. Nothing will be shown if the setting has not been specified.

To edit or change the password and copy limit, select Modify Account Data. To reset the current copy volume, proceed to Step 7.

The Modify Account No. screen of the selected account number will appear.

When specifying/modifying the password: (1)Select Key in Password.

The input area is blank.

(2)Using the keypad, enter a password within the range of 4 to 12 digits and then select Confirm.
The input password is shown in the User Password display.

312

8.5 Auditron Menu

When setting/modifying the copy limit: (1) Select Key in Copy Limit.

The input area is blank.

If you enter 0 for the copy limit, nothing will be shown in the Copy Limit display and no copy limit setting is made. Also, if no value is entered, no copy limit setting is made. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the C button to clear and then re-enter.

(2)Using the keypad, enter 0 or a value within the range of 0 to 6,553,500 in increments of 100, and then select Confirm.
The input number is shown in the Copy Limit display. The input area will remain as blank if you entered 0.

6 7

Select Close when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the Create/Modify Accounts screen.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Select Reset Copy Volume to reset the current copy volume.

0 is displayed in the Copy Volume display.

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

8 9 10

Repeat Steps 3 to 7 to modify the settings of other accounts.

Select Close when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the Auditron Menu screen.

Exit from the Auditron Administrator Mode.

313

8.5 Auditron Menu

8.5.3

Reset Account Data

There are three ways to reset account data. Reset All Account Data
You can reset the copy volumes of all accounts (by department/user) to zero. Also, you can reset data of each account (by department/user) such as password and copy limit.

Reset All Copy Volumes


You can reset the copy volume of all accounts (by department/user) to zero.

Reset All Copy Limits


You can reset the copy limits of all accounts (by department/user) for a no limit setting for all accounts.

Procedure

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

1 2

Display the Auditron Menu screen.

System Administrator Mode Settings

Select Delete/Reset Account Data.

The Delete/Reset Account Data screen is displayed.

Select the button of the type of data that you wish to delete.

A confirmation screen will be displayed.

314

8.5 Auditron Menu

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

4 5 6

Select Confirm to delete.

Select Close.
The display returns to the Auditron Menu screen.

Exit from the Auditron Administrator Mode.

8.5.4
Auditron Mode

Auditron Setup

There are two types of Auditron setup:

To switch on or off the Auditron Mode. If the Auditron Mode is switched on, the Password Entry screen will appear when the power of the machine is switched on or after the Auditron Administrator Mode or Meter Check screen is displayed. The use of the machine can then be controlled. Also, as a copy limit can be specified for each account, you can control the volume of copying. To activate the Auditron Mode, you must set the account data for all users.
8.5.2 Create/Modify Accounts

System Administrator Mode Settings

User Password Entry Screen Timer


You can set the time for the User Password Entry screen to be automatically displayed after the last copy job is done. The timer can be set between 1 to 59 seconds in one second increments, or between 1 to 10 minutes in one minute increments. In addition, you can choose to disable it. Even if the timer is disabled, the User Password Entry screen will appear if the Password button is pressed.

Procedure

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

1 2

Display the Auditron Menu screen.

Select Auditron Setup.

The Auditron Setup screen is displayed.

315

8.5 Auditron Menu

3
When you have not set the account (by department/user) data, you cannot use the Auditron feature even if you select On for Auditron Mode.

Proceed to enable/disable the Auditron Mode and set the User Password Entry Screen Timer. When enabling/disabling Auditron Mode: (1)Select Off to disable or On to enable the Auditron Mode.

When setting User Password Entry Screen Timer: (1)Select Set Timer.

System Administrator Mode Settings

The User Password Entry Screen Timer screen is displayed.

(2) Use

to select the time, or select Disable.

Set the timer between 1 to 59 seconds in one second increments, or between 1 to 10 minutes in one minute increments.

(3)Select Save when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the Auditron Setup screen.

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

4 5

Select Save when all the settings have been checked.


The display returns to the Auditron Menu screen.

Exit from the Auditron Administrator Mode.

316

8.5 Auditron Menu

8.5.5

Change of Password

You can change the password for accessing Auditron Administrator Mode. You can enter a password between 4 to 12 digits.

Procedure

8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

1 2

Display the Auditron Menu screen.

Select Auditron Administrator Password.

System Administrator Mode Settings

The Auditron Administrator Password screen is displayed.

3
Each input digit is represented by an asterisk. If you made a mistake while entering the password, press the C button or select Reset to clear, and then re-enter.

Use the keypad to enter the new password.

317

8.5 Auditron Menu

Select Confirm.

Use the keypad to enter the same password that you have entered in Step 3.

System Administrator Mode Settings


8.1.3 Entering/Exiting Auditron Mode

Select Confirm.

The setting will not be carried out if the passwords that you have entered in Step 3 and 5 are different. If you enter wrongly, select Reset and repeat from Step 3.

7 8

Select Save.
The display returns to the Auditron Menu screen.

Exit from the Auditron Administrator Mode.

318

8.6

Checking Network Settings

The following procedure explains how to check the network settings of this machine.
You can change the mail settings. For the mail setting change procedure, see 7.2.5 Sending Scanned Files Automatically.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

Select Network Settings.

System Administrator Mode Settings

The Network Settings screen appears.

319

8.6 Checking Network Settings

Check the system settings.

4
System Administrator Mode Settings

To finish checking, select Close continuously until the display returns to the copy screen.

320

9 Troubleshooting
9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 Troubleshooting ...............................................................322 Clearing Paper Jams........................................................326 Clearing Document Jams ................................................361 Solving Stapling Problems..............................................365 Solving Curled Output .....................................................369

9.1

Troubleshooting

This section explains how to deal with troubles when they occur.

9.1.1

Dealing With Error Messages

A message will be shown on the display if paper jam or internal machine breakdown occurs. Follow the instructions shown to deal with the problem. If the problem persists even after you have tried the following solutions suggested, contact your Customer Support Center. To deal with messages on paper jams and document jams, refer to 9.2 Clearing Paper Jams and 9.3 Clearing Document Jams. As there is more than one treatment suggested for the following error message, check the reason and treatment before proceeding.
Error Message No document, or document size cannot be detected. Load document, or input document size. Reason Document size is too small to be detected. Document is moved. Document is not placed on the document glass. Document is not loaded properly in the DADF. Treatment Load the documents correctly.
3.2 Loading Documents

For non-standard document size, input the document size.


5.12 Specifying Document Size

9.1.2
Troubleshooting

Dealing With Server Faults

When a fault occurs in the server, follow the instructions below to troubleshoot.
Symptoms Even when the power is turned on, the message Please wait remains on the control panel and the machine does not start. After entering the Power Saver mode from Tools Mode, the machine remains in the Power Saver Mode even if the Power Saver button is pressed. Treatment If the message Please wait remains after the power has been switched on for five minutes, and the machine is not activated, turn the switch to and wait for five minutes before turning it back to |. If the machine is still not activated after this, contact your Customer Support Center. Turn the power switch to turning it to | (On). (Off) and wait for 5 minutes before

322

9.1 Troubleshooting

9.1.3

Dealing With Other Troubles

When other problems occur, follow the check points below to troubleshoot.
Symptoms No power. Check Point Is the plug inserted into the socket? Is the plug firmly inserted to the machine? Is the power switch at | (On)? Is the breaker switch at | (On)? The screen display of the main control panel is dim. Is the brightness adjustment dial at a too dark level? Treatment Push the plug into the socket properly. Push the plug into the machine firmly. Turn the power switch to | (On). Turn the breaker switch to | (On).
1.2.4 Breaker Switch

Use the brightness adjustment dial to adjust the brightness of the screen display.
8.1.1 Using System Administrator Mode

The message, Ready to copy is not displayed. The copies are dirty.

Is the plug inserted into the socket? Are there messages on the display screen? Is the document glass or the document cover dirty? Are the documents of very high transparency level (e.g transparencies)?

Push the plug into the socket properly. Follow the instructions shown to deal with the problem. Clean the document glass or the document cover.
10.1 Cleaning Copier

If documents with high transparency level are used, dirty spots on the document cover will be copied as well. Place a white paper on the document before copying. Adjust either the density level or image quality.
5.17 Adjusting Image Quality 5.18 Adjusting Copy Density

Are the documents textured or burnt?

colored,

rough-

Troubleshooting

Are the documents glossy sensitized paper?

As glossy sensitized paper sticks easily onto the document glass, the shadows are copied as black spots. Place a transparent material, like transparency, below the document.
If the edges of the film below the document are copied, select Lighter for Lighter/Darker.

The copies are too dark. The copies are too light.

Is the copy density set at Darker? Are the documents printed too light? Is the Lighter/Darker Lightest? value set at

Adjust the density level.


5.18 Adjusting Copy Density

Adjust the copy density. For black and white documents, select Pencil Text (Black) in Text for Original Type.
5.19 Specifying Document Type 5.18 Adjusting Copy Density

323

9.1 Troubleshooting

Symptoms Parts of the images are not copied.

Check Point Is the paper moist or damp?

Treatment If the paper is damp, parts of the image may not be copied or the copies may not be clear. Replace with paper from a new ream. Replace with paper from a new ream. The pasted or folded parts of the documents are bent and do not lie completely flat on the document glass. Place a stack of paper on the document to flatten it. Load the documents correctly.
3.2 Loading Documents

Is the paper in the tray folded or wrinkled? Is the document pasted together or folded?

The images are skewed.

Is the document loaded properly? Is the document guide on the DADF skewed?

Load the documents properly and align the document guide with the side of the document.
3.2.2 Loading in DADF

Is the paper tray properly set?

Push in the paper tray completely.


2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Is paper properly loaded in the paper tray? Is the paper guide of tray 5 (bypass tray) aligned with the paper? The copies are not of the desired paper size. Is the document glass or document cover dirty? Is the document material transparent (e.g transparencies)? Is the document skewed? highly

Load the paper properly.


2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Clean the document glass or document cover.


10.1 Cleaning Copier

Place the document on the document glass, and a white paper on the document. Load the documents correctly.
3.2 Loading Documents

Troubleshooting

Is the document loaded properly? Is the document guide on the DADF skewed? Is the document of non-standard size? Is the document folded?

Load the documents correctly.


3.2 Loading Documents

Set the document guide properly.


3.2.2 Loading in DADF

Input the document size.


5.12 Specifying Document Size

Straighten the document and load it again.


3.2 Loading Documents

324

9.1 Troubleshooting

Symptoms Document jams occur very often.

Check Point Are suitable documents used? Are your documents out of shape, name cards, transparencies or of thin material? Does the document have any adhesive paper, clips or cellophane attached to it? Is the document guide skewed? Is the document torn and pieces of the paper left in the DADF?

Treatment Load suitable documents on the DADF.


3.1 Types of Documents 3.2 Loading Documents

Remove all attachment like adhesive paper, clips and cellophane before making copies. Set the document guide properly.
3.2.2 Loading in DADF

Open the DADF cover to check.


9.3 Clearing Document Jams

Paper is often jammed or wrinkled.

Is paper properly loaded in the paper tray? Is the paper tray properly set?

Load the paper properly.


2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Push in the paper tray completely.


2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Is the paper loaded in the paper tray folded or wrinkled? Is the paper curled?

Replace with paper from a new ream.


2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Turn over the paper in the paper tray or replace with paper from a new ream.
2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Are there jammed/torn paper or foreign objects left inside the machine?

Open the machine or pull out the paper tray to remove the paper or objects.
2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Is the paper moist or damp?

Replace with paper from a new ream.


2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Troubleshooting

Is paper loaded in the paper tray of the correct specification?

Replace with paper of the correct specification.


2.1 Paper to Use 2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

Has the paper in the paper tray exceeded the maximum fill line?

Do not load the paper exceeding the maximum fill line.


2.2 Loading Paper/Changing Paper Size of Paper Trays

The document cannot be fed into the DADF. The document edge is folded.

Is the document too small?

The smallest size that can be loaded in the DADF is A5.


3.1 Types of Documents

Is the document curled?

Straighten the document and load it again.

325

9.2

Clearing Paper Jams

Once a paper jam is detected, the machine will stop and an error message is displayed. Follow the instructions displayed to remove the jammed paper. Remove the jammed paper gently to avoid tearing it. Even if the paper tears while you are removing it from the machine, ensure that you discard all the torn pieces. When this is done and the paper jam message still remains, follow the instructions on the display to check for paper jams at other locations. After clearing all the paper jams, the message, Press Start to continue the job (Or press C button to cancel the job) is displayed. Press the Start button to begin copying from where you left off prior to the jam. Press the C button if you wish to cancel the copy job. When removing jammed paper, make sure that no torn pieces of paper are left in the machine. If not, fire may occur as a result. Do not force the paper out when pieces of paper are stuck or when removing them from the fuser or heat roller as you may get hurt or burnt. Switch off the machine immediately and contact your Customer Support Center.

This section describes how to remove jammed paper from the following locations: Trays 1 - 4 Tray 5 (bypass) Tray 6 (HCF) Tray 7 Lower left area of copier Inside copier Inside finisher left door Inside finisher right door Folding Unit (Z and C) Output area of finisher

Troubleshooting

326

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

9.2.1

Trays 1 - 4

The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed in trays 1 to 4. Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Procedure

Pull out the paper tray that is shown on the display.

Remove paper.

the

jammed

327

Troubleshooting

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

3
A message will appear and the machine will not start if the tray is not pushed in completely. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

Push the tray in slowly to the end.

9.2.2

Tray 5 (Bypass)

The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at tray 5 (bypass). Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

Procedure

Lift the lever on the top cover of tray 5 (bypass) to open it.
There is a magnet in the machine to attract and hold the top cover.

328

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

2.2.2 Loading Paper in Tray 5 (Bypass)

Remove the paper from (bypass).

jammed tray 5

3
If the top cover of tray 5 (bypass) is not closed properly, an error message is displayed and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

Close the top cover of tray 5 (bypass).

When using multiple sheets of paper, remove all the sheets to reset them.

Reload the paper into tray 5 (bypass) properly.


The paper jam message will remain if paper is still left in the machine. Remove the paper or check for jammed paper at other locations.

Troubleshooting

329

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

9.2.3

HCF

Here, we explain how to remove paper jams which can occur at the various locations of the HCF. The explanation is divided into: Paper jam at HCF, Paper jam inside HCF (top cover), Paper jam inside HCF (top right cover) and Paper jam between HCF and copier.

Paper jam at HCF


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at the HCF. Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Procedure

1
Troubleshooting

Pull out the HCF right to the end.


The bottom plate is lowered automatically.

Remove paper.

the

jammed

330

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

3
A message will appear and the machine will not start if the tray is not closed completely. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

Push in the tray slowly until it stops.

Paper jam inside top cover


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed inside the top cover of the HCF. Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

Procedure

Open the top cover of the HCF.

331

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Remove paper.

the

jammed

3
If the top cover of the machine is not closed completely, an error message will appear and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

Close the top cover.

Paper jam inside top right cover


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed inside the upper right cover of the HCF. Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

332

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Procedure

Slide the HCF to the left, until the end.

Open the top right cover of the HCF.

Remove paper.

the

jammed

4
If the top right cover of the machine is not closed completely, an error message will appear and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

Troubleshooting

Close the top right cover.

333

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Slide back the HCF to the right, until it is connected to the machine.

Paper jam between HCF and copier


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed between the HCF and the copier. Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Procedure

Slide the HCF to the left, until the end.

Troubleshooting

334

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Press the latch on the lower left cover of the machine to open it.

Remove paper.

the

jammed

4
Close the lower left cover of the machine completely. If the HCF is connected to the copier with this cover left open, it might lead to machine breakdown or damage.

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

Close the lower left cover of the machine.

Check that the lower left cover is completely closed when connecting HCF to the machine. If the HCF is connected to the machine with this cover left open, it might lead to machine breakdown or damage.

Slide back the HCF to the right, until it is connected to the machine.

Troubleshooting

335

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

9.2.4

Tray 7

The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at tray 7. Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Procedure

Lift up the document output tray, and press the button shown in the diagram.

Open cover R4 to remove the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

3
336

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

If the cover is not closed completely, an error message is and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

Close cover R4 and return the document output tray to the original position.

9.2.5

Lower Left Area

The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at the lower left area of the copier. Follow the procedure below to remove the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

Procedure

Press the latch on the lower left cover of the machine to open it.

337

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Remove paper.

the

jammed

If the lower left cover of the machine is not closed completely, an error message is displayed and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

3 4

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Close the lower left cover of the machine.

Troubleshooting

338

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

9.2.6

Inside Copier

The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at the transfer module of the machine. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.
Never touch the areas on or near the fuser unit that are affixed with labels like Hot Surface and CAUTION. You can get burnt as a result.
The following error message is displayed when paper jam occurred at the four named locations inside the machine. The error message displayed differs according to the location of the paper jam.

Procedure

Open the front door.

Troubleshooting

Turn the green lever at the center of the transfer module to the right until it is in the horizontal position and then pull the transfer module out to the end.

339

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Remove the jammed paper while lifting lever 1.


Never touch the areas on or near the fuser unit that are affixed with labels like Hot Surface and CAUTION. You can get burnt as a result.

If paper is jammed at the top of the transfer module or inside the fuser unit, remove it by pulling it out towards the left.
Never touch the areas on or near the fuser unit that are affixed with labels like Hot Surface and CAUTION. You can get burnt as a result.

If the jammed paper cannot be removed, turn the green lever on the right of the fuser unit to the right to open it, and then remove the sheet.
Never touch the areas on or near the fuser unit that are affixed with labels like Hot Surface and CAUTION. You can get burnt as a result.

Troubleshooting

Press levers 3 and 4 down to remove the jammed paper.


Never touch the areas on or near the fuser unit that are affixed with labels like Hot Surface and CAUTION. You can get burnt as a result.

340

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Press levers 3 and 4 up to their original positions.

Push in the transfer module completely and turn the green lever to the left.
If the lever cannot be turned, pull out the transfer module halfway and push it in again.

If the front door of the machine is not closed completely, an error message is displayed and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

Close the front door.

341

Troubleshooting

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

9.2.7

Inside Finisher Left Door

Here, we explain how to remove jammed paper inside the finisher. The explanation is divided into: Paper jam at lever R1 and cover 5; Paper jam at lever R1 and knob R2; and Paper jam at levers R3a and R3b. Open the finisher left door shown below to remove the jammed paper.

When paper jam occurs inside the finisher, the error message displayed differs according to the paper jam location. If a lever or cover is not returned to the original position, an error messages is displayed and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

Paper jam at lever R1 and cover 5


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at lever R1 and cover 5 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

342

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Procedure

1 2

Open the left door of the finisher.

Lift up lever R1, press down the button at the lower right of the finisher and open the lower right cover 5.

Remove paper.

the

jammed

4 5

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

Close the lower right cover 5 and return lever R1 to the original position.

Troubleshooting

Close the left door of the finisher.

343

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at lever R1 and knob R2


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at lever R1 and knob R2 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the left door of the finisher. Remove the jammed paper by lifting lever R1 and turning the knob R2 to the left.

Refer to Paper jam at levers R3a and R3b for details of lever R3a.

3 4

Troubleshooting

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return lever R1 to the original position.

If the cover is not closed completely, an error message is displayed and the machine will not start.

Close the left door of the finisher.

344

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at levers R3a and R3b


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at levers R3a and R3b of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the left door of the finisher.

Move lever R3b to remove the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

If you cannot remove the paper in Step 2, lift up lever R3a to remove the jammed paper.

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

345

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Return levers R3a and R3b to the original position.

Close the left door of the finisher.

9.2.8

Inside Finisher Right Door

Here, we explain how to remove jammed paper inside the finisher. The explanation is divided into: Paper jam at levers R12a and R12b; Paper jam at lever R14a and knob R13; Paper jam at lever R14b and knob R15; and Paper jam at lever R16 and knob R11. Open the finisher right door shown below to remove the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

When paper jam occurs inside the finisher, the error message displayed differs according to the paper jam location. If a lever or cover is not returned to the original position, an error messages is displayed and the machine will not start. If paper or documents are still jammed at other locations, other error messages will be displayed.

346

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at levers R12a and R12b


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at levers R12a and R12b of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher. Move levers R12a and R12b, and remove the jammed paper.

Refer to Paper jam at lever R5 and knob R11 in 9.2.9 Folding Unit (Z and C) for details of lever R5 and knob R11.

3 4

Troubleshooting

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return levers R12a and R12b to the original position.

Close the right door of the finisher.

347

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at lever R14a and knob R13


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at lever R14a and knob R13 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher. Move lever R14a, turn knob R13 to the right, and remove the jammed paper.

Refer to Paper jam at levers R12a and R12b for details of levers R12a and R12b.

3 4

Troubleshooting

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return lever R14a to the original position.

Close the right door of the finisher.

348

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at lever R14b and knob R15


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at lever R14b and knob R15 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher. Move lever R14b, turn knob R15 to the left, and remove the jammed paper

3 4

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return lever R14b to the original position.

Troubleshooting

Close the right door of the finisher.

349

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at lever R16 and knob R11


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at lever R16 and knob R11 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher. Move lever R16, turn knob R11 to the right, and remove the jammed paper

3 4

Troubleshooting

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return lever R16 to the original position.

Close the right door of the finisher.

350

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

9.2.9

Folding Unit (Z and C)

This section explains how to remove jammed paper from inside the folding unit (Z and C) when this optional unit is installed in a staple finisher (optional) or a booklet maker finisher (optional); Paper jam at areas R5 and R11; Paper jam at tri-fold output tray R9 and area R10; Paper jam at areas R6 and R7; Paper jam at areas R7 and R8a/area R8b and tri-fold output tray R9; Paper jam at unit R17, areas R18 and R19. Open the right cover as shown below to clear the jammed paper.

The messages displayed vary depending on the position of the paper jam. If levers or covers are not properly set or are not completely closed, a message appears and the machine will not start. If a document or paper is jammed in a position other than in the folding unit, another message appears. Follow the instructions to clear the jammed paper.

Paper jam at lever R5 and knob R11


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at lever R5 and knob R11 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

351

Troubleshooting

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher.

Lift up lever R5 and then turn knob R11 counterclockwise to remove the jammed paper.

3 4

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return lever R5 to the original position.

5
Troubleshooting

Close the right door of the finisher.

352

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at lever R6 and knob R7


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at lever R6 and knob R7 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher. Swing lever R6 and turn knob R7 clockwise to remove the jammed paper.

3 4

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return lever R6 to the original position.

Troubleshooting

Close the right door of the finisher.

353

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at knob R7, levers R8a/area R8b, and tri-fold output tray R9
The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher.

Pull out the tri-fold output tray R9, swing lever R8a to the right, and remove the jammed paper.

You cannot open both levers R8a and R8b at the same time. Open one lever R8b, after swinging back the other lever R8a.

Troubleshooting

If you cannot remove the paper in Step 2, swing back lever R8a and swing lever R8b to the right, turn knob R7 to the right, then remove the jammed paper.

4
354

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine.

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Swing back the opened lever (R8b or R8a), and push back the tri-fold output tray R9.

Close the right door of the finisher.

Paper jam at tri-fold output tray R9 and lever R10


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at tri-fold output tray R9 and lever R10 of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

Procedure

1 2

Open the right door of the finisher.

Pull out the tri-fold output tray R9, swing lever R10 to the right, and remove the jammed paper.

355

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

3 4

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Return lever R10 to the original position and push back the tri-fold output tray R9.

Close the right door of the finisher.

Paper jam at unit R17, lever R18, and knob R19


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Troubleshooting

Procedure

Open the right door of the finisher.

356

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Pull out unit R17.

Turn knob R19 to the left to remove all the jammed paper from the left side of the unit.

If paper is jammed at lever R18, open lever R18 to remove the paper.

5 6

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Push unit R17 back to the original position.

Troubleshooting

Close the right door of the finisher.

357

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

9.2.10 Output Area of Finisher


Here, we explains how to remove jammed paper at the output area of the finisher. The explanation is divided into: Paper jam at output tray; Paper jam at finisher tray; Paper jam at booklet output tray.

Paper jam at output tray


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

1
Troubleshooting
If the front door is not closed completely, an error message is displayed and the machine will not start.

Remove the jammed paper from the output tray.

2 3

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Open and Close the right door of the finisher until the message disappears.

358

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at finisher tray


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

Remove the jammed paper from the finisher tray.

If the front door is not closed completely, an error message is displayed and the machine will not start.

2 3

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Open and Close the right door of the finisher until the message disappears.

359

Troubleshooting

9.2 Clearing Paper Jams

Paper jam at booklet output tray


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at booklet output tray of the finisher. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

Open the right door of the finisher.

Turn knob R17 to the right to remove the jammed paper at the booklet output tray.

Troubleshooting
If the front door is not closed completely, an error message is displayed and the machine will not start.

3 4

If the paper is torn, check that no torn pieces are left in the machine. Close the right door of the finisher.

360

9.3

Clearing Document Jams

Once the document is jammed in the DADF, the machine will stop and error message will appear. Follow the instructions to clear the jam and then re-load the documents into the DADF.

Document jam at left cover (top area)


Once the document is jammed in the DADF, the machine will stop and the following error message will appear. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed paper.

Procedure

Lift the latch at the center of the DADF left cover until it is completely opened.
The inner cover will be lifted together with the left cover.

361

Troubleshooting

9.3 Clearing Document Jams

Remove the document.

jammed

Push the left cover of the DADF back until it clicks.

Loading torn, folded or wrinkled documents will jam or damage the documents. For such documents, place them directly on the document glass. When you divide a large document stack for scanning, reload all the documents of the stack that is loaded after a document jam is cleared. You do not need to reload the stacks of documents before the document jam was detected.

Check that the documents are not torn, folded or wrinkled, and then follow the displayed instructions and reload the document in the DADF.
After you have removed the jammed documents, reload all the documents, including those that have been output. Those documents that have been previously scanned will be automatically skipped and scanning will begin for the others.

Troubleshooting

362

9.3 Clearing Document Jams

Document jam at output area and underneath DADF


The following message will be displayed if paper is jammed at the output area and underneath the DADF. Follow the instructions below to clear the jammed document.

Troubleshooting

Procedure

Remove the jammed document at the output area of the DADF.

363

9.3 Clearing Document Jams

Lift the DADF slowly.

Remove the document.

jammed

Put the DADF slowly back in place.

Loading torn, folded or wrinkled documents will jam or damage the documents. For such documents, place them directly on the document glass. When you divide a large document stack for scanning, reload all the documents of the stack that is loaded after a document jam is cleared. You do not need to reload the stacks of documents before the document jam was detected.

Check that the documents are not torn, folded or wrinkled, and then follow the displayed instructions and reload the document in the DADF.
After you have removed the jammed documents, reload all the documents, including those that have been output. Those documents that have been previously scanned will be automatically skipped and scanning will begin for the others.

Troubleshooting

364

9.4

Solving Stapling Problems

This section explains the problems that may arise from stapling. If no staple is found or the staple is bent after stapling, follow the procedure on the next page to proceed. If the suggestion does not solve your problem, contact your Customer Support Center.
No Staple Bent Staple

If staples are in the following conditions after stapling, contact your Customer Support Center.
Only one side of staple is secured Staple is bent in wrong direction

Broken staple

Staple is not secured

Staple is not secured and bent at the centre

Troubleshooting

Open the staple cartridge cover only when removing the bent staple. If you do not remove the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result.

Cover

Bent staple

365

9.4 Solving Stapling Problems

Procedure

Check that the machine has stopped and then open the right door of the finisher.

Remove the staple cartridge.

UR1 (1) Lift up the lever as shown in the diagram.

(2)Pull the cartridge.

staple

Troubleshooting

Open the staple cartridge cover only when removing the bent staple. If you do not remove the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result.

(3)Open the staple cartridge cover as shown in the diagram and remove the jammed staple.
When removing the staple, be extra careful not to injure your fingers.

366

9.4 Solving Stapling Problems

If the staples cannot be removed in the suggested way, contact your Customer Support Center.

(4)If the jammed staple cannot be removed, push the staple in the direction shown to remove it.

(5)Push the staple cartridge back to the original position.

Take care not to jam paper in the cartridge when paper remains in the finisher.

(6)Close the cover until it clicks.

When the booklet staple cartridge UR2 (front) or UR3 (back) is used: (1)Pressing the lever to the right, pull out the cartridge.

Troubleshooting

(2)Holding the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, slide the cartridge to the left to remove.

367

9.4 Solving Stapling Problems

(3)Remove the jammed staple as shown in the diagram.


When removing the staple, be extra careful not to injure your fingers.

(4)Holding the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, return the cartridge to the original position and gently push it until it clicks.

(5)Push the cartridge back to the original position.

If the right door of the finisher is not closed completely, error message will remain and the machine will not start.

Close the right door of the finisher.

Troubleshooting

368

9.5

Solving Curled Output

You can correct the curling of output by pressing the De-curl button. This feature is used only when the output is curled upward. The De-curl button functions both in suspension and in operation if the power of the this machine is on. The curling may be reversed by reloading the paper upside down if the output is curled downward.

If the output copy is curled downward, the De-curl button will not function even if it is pressed. To change the curling correction mode among Auto, ON, and OFF, press the De-curl button on the finisher, not the Reset button on the control panel, while the machine is in operation. The change will be applied immediately after the De-curl button is pressed.

Procedure

If the power saver mode is canceled, the curling correction mode is set to Auto.

Check that De-curl lights up.


When turning on the power of this machine, the de-curl mode is set to Auto.

Troubleshooting

Press De-curl.
Pressing the De-curl button toggles the mode between Auto, ON, and OFF.
Auto ON OFF

Refer to Modes and functions of De-curl button for details.

369

9.5 Solving Curled Output

Modes and functions of De-curl button


De-curl button Functions Indicator Mode Auto Performs curling correction automatically. The optimal curling correction is automatically performed according to the paper size or output orientation. It is recommended that this feature be used in Auto mode. The Auto mode is entered in the following cases: - After turning on the power of this machine - After canceling the power saver mode The upward curling can be corrected.

ON

OFF

Press this button when the output has no curling or the output is curled downward.

Troubleshooting

370

10Daily Care
10.1 Cleaning Copier................................................................372 10.2 Consumables....................................................................373 10.3 Replacing Toner Cartridge ..............................................376 10.4 Replacing Waste Toner Bottle A .....................................379 10.5 Replacing Staple Cartridge .............................................381 10.6 Emptying Punch Scrap Container ..................................385 10.7 Checking Meter ................................................................387

10.1

Cleaning Copier

If the document cover, DADF (belt area) and document glass are dirty, copies made might be dirtied and the document size might not be detected accurately. In order that clean copies can be made each time, you are recommended to clean the copier once a month.
Do not use chemicals like benzene and thinner. These may damage the paint and coating of plastic parts of the machine. Do not use too much water. It might damage the document or cause machine breakdown.

Cleaning document cover/DADF (belt area)


Follow the procedure below to clean the document cover and the DADF.

Procedure

1 2

Use a wet, soft piece of cloth to wipe the areas.

Use a dry, soft piece of cloth to dry the wiped areas.

Cleaning document glass


Follow the procedure below to clean the document glass.

Procedure

1
Daily Care

Use a wet, soft piece of cloth to wipe the areas.

Use a dry, soft piece of cloth to dry the wiped areas.

372

10.2

Consumables

You can check the consumables status on the screen. This section explains how to handle the consumables and check their status.

Checking consumables status


Refer to the Consumables screen to check the consumables status at a glance. The consumables status is indicated as OK, Replace Soon (Near Empty), Replace Now (Empty) or Full. To display the Consumables screen, follow the procedure below.

The consumables displayed in the screen differ depending on the optional product installed. If Replace Now is displayed for Drum Cartridge, contact your Customer Support Center.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

373

Daily Care

10.2 Consumables

Select Check Consumables.

The Consumables screen is displayed.

3 4

Select Close after checking.


The display returns to the Menu screen.

Select Close.
The display returns to the copy screen.

Types of consumables
The following consumables are available for this machine.
Types of consumables Toner cartridge Drum Cartridge Waste toner bottle -- Western Hemisphere (WH) Waste toner bottle -- Xerox Europe (XE) Staple cartridge for 100 sheets Xerox A Staple cartridge for 50 sheets Xerox B*1 -- WH Staple cartridge for 50 sheets Xerox B*1 -- XE Staple cartridge for booklet maker finisher Xerox C*2
*1 Optional *2 For booklet maker finisher You can replace the staple cartridge installed in the finisher to the optional cartridge for 50 sheets. For details, contact your Customer Support Center.

Packaging 1 per box 1 per box 1 per box 1 per box 50003 sets per box 50003 sets per box 50003 sets per box 50004 sets per box

Product Code 6R1145 13R587 8R7976 8R7983 8R12898 8R12724 8R12723 8R12925

Daily Care

374

10.2 Consumables

Handling consumables
Do not place the boxes of consumables vertically. Open the packaging of the consumables only when you need to use them. Do not store them in the following places:
Hot and humid places Near a fire Under direct sunlight Dusty places

Follow the instructions and warning notes on the boxes and containers of the consumables before using them. It is recommended to prepare an extra box of consumables. Check the product code of the consumables and contact your Customer Support Center to place your orders. If you use toner cartridge, waste toner bottle or staple cartridge that is not recommended by us, the machine might not be able to realize its best quality and performance. Therefore, always use only the recommended products.

375

Daily Care

10.3

Replacing Toner Cartridge

The toner cartridge contains toner that decreases each time after a copy is made. When it is time for the toner cartridge to be replaced, the message below is displayed. When the message is displayed, replace the toner cartridge.I f you continue to do copying without replacing the toner cartridge, you can make another 2,000 copies before the machine stops and no further copying will then be allowed. The number of copies allowed, however, may differ according to the document used. Never throw the toner cartridge into a fire. It might explode and you can get burnt.
Contact your Customer Support Center for proper disposal of the used toner cartridges. If you use toner cartridge, waste toner bottle or staple cartridge that is not recommended by us, the machine may

not be able to realize its best quality and performance. Therefore, always use only the recommended products.
When replacing the toner cartridge, be careful of the toner spilling over and dirtying the floor. It is recommended to spread some paper under the machine before replacing the oil cartridge.

Procedure

1
Daily Care

Check that the machine has stopped and then open the front door.

376

10.3 Replacing Toner Cartridge

Turn the toner cartridge unit to the right to open.

Turn the toner cartridge to the left until it aligns with the unlock sign and a click sound is heard.

Pull out the toner cartridge slowly.

The toner may spatter. Contact your Customer Support Center for proper disposal of used toner cartridges.

Pull out the toner cartridge slowly and then lift to remove it.
Never throw the toner cartridge into a fire. It might explode and you can get burnt.

Shake the new toner cartridge to the left and right.

Hold the toner cartridge with the arrow () mark facing up, and insert it in by aligning the mark on the new cartridge with the mark on the machine.

377

Daily Care

10.3 Replacing Toner Cartridge

Push and turn the toner cartridge to the right until the end.

Turn the toner cartridge unit to the left until it clicks.

If the front door of the machine is not closed properly, error message will remain and the machine will not stop.

Close the front door.


The Ready to copy message is displayed.

Daily Care

378

10.4

Replacing Waste Toner Bottle A

When the waste toner bottle is full, the message below will be displayed. When the message is displayed, replace the waste toner bottle. If you continue to do copying without replacing the waste toner bottle, you can make another 2,100 copies before the machine stops. The number of copies allowed, however, may differ according to the document used. Never throw toner or a used waste toner bottle into a fire. It might explode and you can get burnt.
Contact your Customer Support Center for proper disposal of the used waste toner bottle. If you use toner cartridge, waste toner bottle or staple cartridge that is not recommended by us, the machine may

not be able to realize its best quality and performance. Therefore, always use the recommended products.
The used toner may spill over when replacing the waste toner bottle. It is recommended to spread some paper under the machine before proceeding.

Procedure

Check that the machine has stopped and then open the front door.

379

Daily Care

10.4 Replacing Waste Toner Bottle A

The waste toner bottle is long and

may be heavy due to the used toner in it. Use both hands to support the cartridge as you pull it out.

Grip the handle of the waste toner bottle and pull out about half of it.

Hold the center part of the bottle as shown in the diagram, and then use both hands to remove the bottle.

Contact your Customer Support

Place the used bottle into the special bag provided.


Never throw toner or a used waste toner bottle into a fire. It might explode and you can get burnt.

Center for proper disposal of used waste toner bottles.

Push the new waste toner bottle all the way into the machine.

If the front door of the machine is not closed properly, error message will remain and the machine will not

Close the front door.


The Ready to copy message is displayed.

Daily Care

380

10.5

Replacing Staple Cartridge

The message below will be displayed when it is time to replace to staple cartridge. Replace the staple cartridge when the message is displayed.
Contact your Customer Support Center to place order for the staple cartridge.

Open the staple cartridge cover only when removing the bent staple. If you do not remove the bent staple, a staple jam may occur as a result.

Cover

Bent Staple

Procedure

Open the right door of the finisher.

381

Daily Care

10.5 Replacing Staple Cartridge

Replace the staple case.

When staple cartridge UR1 is used (1)Hold the UR1 at the position shown in the diagram and lift it slightly.

(2)Pull out cartridge.

the

staple

(3)Push the positions indicated by arrows to remove the staple case from the cartridge.

(4)Push the new staple case into the staple cartridge.

Daily Care

(5)Remove the seal attached to the new staple case as shown in the diagram.

382

10.5 Replacing Staple Cartridge

(6)Hold the staple case as shown in the diagram.

(7)Push the removed cartridge back to the original position.

Take care not to jam paper in the cartridge when paper remains in the finisher.

(8)Push it downward until it clicks.

When the booklet staple cartridge UR2 (front) or UR3 (back) is used:
To refill the booklet staples, replace the entire cartridge.

(1)Pressing the lever to the right, pull out the cartridge unit.

Daily Care

(2)Holding the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, slide the cartridge to the left to remove.

383

10.5 Replacing Staple Cartridge

(4)Holding the tabs of the booklet staple cartridge, return the cartridge to the original position and gently push it until it clicks.

(4)Push the cartridge back to the original position.

If the right door of the machine is not closed properly, error message will remain and the machine will not start.

Close the right door of the finisher.

Daily Care

384

10.6

Emptying Punch Scrap Container

The message below will be displayed when it is time to empty the punch scrap container. Discard the scraps when the message is displayed. When pulling the punch scrap container out to dispose the punch scraps, ensure that all the scraps are discarded. If there are scraps remaining, the container may be full before the next message is displayed, and this may cause machine breakdown. Remove the container while the power is on. If you switch off the power when emptying the scraps box, the machine will not be able to detect that the scraps have been disposed.

Procedure

Open the right door of the finisher.

Pull out the punch scrap container R4 in the direction indicated by the arrow.

385

Daily Care

10.6 Emptying Punch Scrap Container

When the punch scrap container has been pulled out even slightly, ensure that all the scraps are discarded. If there are scraps remaining, the container may be full before the next message is displayed, and this may cause machine breakdown.

Discard all the scraps.

Push the empty punch scarp container all the way back.

If the front door of the machine is not closed properly, error message will remain and the machine will not start.

Close the right door of the finisher.

Daily Care

386

10.7

Checking Meter

You can check the total number of copies made so far on the Meter Check screen. The total number of copies for each department can be checked on the Accounts Meter Check screen. When the Auditron Administration Mode is enabled, you can also check the total number of copies made for an account.
8.5 Auditron Menu The following types of copies will not be counted by the meter: Blank pages inserted by the machine (blank pages created automatically when making two-sided copies in odd number of pages). Transparency separators inserted when copying with the Transparency feature (however, this will be counted when Printed Separators is selected). Jammed paper and paper automatically discarded by the machine during an error.

10.7.1 Checking sum of copies made


The total number of copies is displayed on the Meter Check screen. Each copy job is added to the meter reading.

Procedure

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

2
The Copy Counter shows two types of reading: No. of Originals Scanned and No. of Copies Made. Press Reset to reset the numbers to 0.

Select Billing Meter.

387

Daily Care

10.7 Checking Meter

The Billing Meter screen is displayed.


Record the reading of Meter 1 of Current Meter Reading when reporting your meter reading fax.

3 4

Select Close after checking.


The display returns to the Menu screen.

Select Close.
The display returns to the copy screen.

10.7.2 Checking the Total Number of Copies for Each Department


The total number of copies is displayed for each department on the Account Billing Meter screen. Even users other than Auditron administrators can check the total number of copies and allowed number of copies for each department.
8.5 Auditron Menu

Procedure

1
Daily Care

Press System Settings/ Meter Check.


The Menu screen is displayed.

388

10.7 Checking Meter

2
The copy document counter displays the number of document pages fed up to present, along with the number of pages that have been copied and output. When Rest is selected, the number of pages counted returns to 0.

Select Account Billing Meter.

The Account Billing Meter screen is displayed.


When a copy limit is set, you can check the number of copies until the copy limit is reached in Balance.

3 4

After you have checked the meter, select Close.


The display returns to the setting items screen.

Select Close.
The display returns to the copy screen.

389

Daily Care

10.7 Checking Meter

Daily Care

390

Appendix
A B C D Specifications...................................................................392 Possible Combinations of Features ...............................398 Originals/Copies Orientation (With Covers) ..................404 Originals/Copies Orientation (With Drilled Paper) ........407

Specifications

The following is a list of main specifications of the 2101. Changes to specifications and the appearance of the product may be made without prior notice.

Appendix

Standard specifications
Copier Type Copying Method Development Method Document Table Type Photosensitive Type Fusing System Scanning Method Scanning Resolution Memory Resolution Warm-Up Time (For 200 V model) Document Size Copy Paper Size Console Indirect electrostatic Dry development Fixed Organic photosensitive conductor (OPC) Heat roller CCD scanning in main direction Fast scan: 400 dpi (15.7 dots/mm)/8 bit Slow scan: 400 dpi (15.7 dots/mm)/8 bit Fast scan: 600 dpi (23.6 dots/mm)/1 bit Slow scan: 600 dpi (23.6 dots/mm)/1 bit Within 6 min (room temperature: 20C (Within 120 sec (room temperature 20C): after exiting the Power Saver Mode (1 hour)) Document glass: Max: 297432 mm, Min: no limit DADF: Max: 297432 mm, Min: 148210 mm Tray 1 Tray 2,3,4 : A4 portrait, A5*1, B5 portrait*1, 8.511" portrait*1 : B5, B5 portrait, A4, A4 portrait, B4, A3, 810" portrait, 8.511" portrait, 8.511", 8.513", 8.514", 1117", 1218"*2, 8 K, 16 K, non-standard sizes (Y direction: 182 to 297 mm, X direction: 182 to 432 mm)*2 : [standard size] postcard, A5, B5, A4, A4 portrait, B4, A3, SRA3 (320450 mm/12.617.7")*3, 5.58.5", 810" portrait, 8.511" portrait, 8.511", 8.514", 1117", 1218"*3 [non-standard size] Y direction: 148 to 297 mm, X direction: 200 to 432 mm

Tray 5 (bypass)

*1,2 *3

Contact our Customer Support Center. When copying onto paper size SRA3(320450mm/12.617.7") and 1218", adjust the paper guide in the tray before loading the paper.

Copy Paper (G.S.M)

Tray 1 Tray 2,3,4 Tray 5 (bypass)

: 56, 64 to 105 g/m2 : 56, 64 to 128 g/m2 : 56, 64 to 220 g/m2

Use the recommended paper. Follow the instruction described in Chapter 2 Loading Paper. Image Loss First Copy Time Magnification Lead edge 4mm or less, Trail edge 4mm or less, Both edge 4mmm or less Document glass DADF Size-for-size Preset R/E : 4.2 sec (A4 portrait/Tray 1/100% magnification/1-sided copying) : 6.3 sec (A4 portrait/Tray 1/100% magnification/1-sided copying) 1: 1 0.5% 1: 0.500, 1:0.707, 1:0.816, 1:0.866, 1:1.154, 1:1.224, 1:1.414 1: 0.250 to 1:4.000 (at 1% increments)

Variable R/E

392

A Specifications

Continuous Copy Speed

<Using trays 1 to 4 and 6, continuous 1-sided copying, size-for-size:> B5 portrait : 110 copies/min B5 : 62 copies/min A4 portrait : 101 copies/min A4 : 62 copies/min B4 : 62 copies/min A3 : 52 copies/min <Using tray 5 (bypass), continuous 1-sided copying, size-for-size:> A4 portrait : 50 copies/min A4 : 35 copies/min B4 : 35 copies/min A3 : 35 copies/min The continuous copy speed sometimes drops due to adjustment of image quality.

Appendix

Paper Supply Capacity

Tray 1 : 560 sheets (FX P paper)/620 sheets (FX L paper) Tray 2 to 4 : 620 sheets (FX P paper)/680 sheets (FX L paper) Tray 5 (bypass) : 150 sheets (FX P paper)/160 sheets (FX L paper) Tray 6 (HCF, optional): 4,300 sheets (FX P paper)/4,500 sheets (FX L paper) <Maximum paper supply capacity> 6,870 sheets (Tray 1 to 6) (FX P paper)/7,320 sheets (Tray 1 to 6) (FX L paper)

No. of Copies Power

Continuous

9,999 sheets The continuous copy speed sometimes drops due to adjustment of image quality. AC 200 V 10%, 15 A, 50/60Hz AC 200V Maximum Power Consumption : 2.2 kW Low Power Mode : 295 W (standby mode: 440 W) Power Saver Off Mode : 14 W (W) 1,023 (D) 825 (H) 1,418 mm 231 kg (including a new toner cartridge, excluding server (15 kg) and paper) <With staple finisher> (W) 2,062 (D) 825 mm (extending tray 5 (bypass) completely) <With booklet maker finisher> (W) 2,067 (D) 825 mm (extending tray 5 (bypass) completely)

Power Consumption

Dimensions Weight Minimum Space Requirements

First copy time refers to the output time of the very first sheet of paper.

393

A Specifications

$
DADF
Document Size G.S.M. Output Tray Capacity Document Feed Speed Maximum: 297432 mm (A3, 1117"), Minimum: 148210 mm (A5 portrait) A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, A5, A5 portrait, B5, B5 portrait, 8.511", 8.511" portrait, 8.514" 38 to 128 g/m2 (2-sided document: 50 to 110 g/m2) 50 sheets (but up to 40 sheets only for paper exceeding 100 g/m2) (FX P and L paper) 50 sheets (A4 portrait/1-sided)

Appendix

HCF
Paper Size A4 portrait, B5 portrait*, 8.511" portrait
* When loading B5 portrait paper first, contact your Customer Support Center.

Paper Supply Capacity G.S.M. Dimensions Weight

4,300 sheets (FX P paper)/4,500 sheets (FX L paper) 56, 64 to 128 g/m2 (W) 500 (paper tray + connecting portion to main body) (D) 653 (H) 570 mm 58 kg

394

A Specifications

Staple finisher (optional)/booklet maker finisher (optional)


Tray Type Output Tray Paper Size Output tray Finisher tray : Collated/Uncollated : Collated/Uncollated (Offset available) A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, B5, B5 portrait, A5, postcard, 1218", 12.617.7" (SRA3), 1117", 8.514", 8.513", 8.511", 8.511" portrait, 810" portrait, 5.58.5", 8 K, 16 K portrait, non-standard sizes (Y direction: 100 to 320 mm, X direction: 148 to 457.2 mm)

Appendix

Capacity G.S.M. Finisher Tray Paper Size

500 sheets (FX P and L paper) 56 to 220 g/m2 A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, B5*, B5 portrait, 1218"*1, 12.617.7" (SRA3)*1, 1117", 8.514", 8.513", 8.511", 8.511" portrait, 810" portrait, 8 K, 16 K portrait, non-standard sizes (Y direction: 182 to 320 mm, X direction: 182 mm to 457.2 mm)*2
*1 Offset unavailable *2 Offset unavailable: Y direction is 181 mm or less, 298 mm or more. Uncollated unavailable: X or Y direction is 181 mm or less.

Capacity

<Staple finisher> 3,000 sheets, 200 sets* : B5 portrait, A4 portrait, 8.511" portrait, 810" portrait, 16 K portrait, 1,500 sheets, 100 sets* : B5, A4, B4, A3, 8.511, 8.513, 8.514, 8 K, 1117", 1218", 12.617.7" (SRA3) <Booklet maker finisher> 2,000 sheets, 200 sets* : B5 portrait, A4 portrait, 8.511" portrait, 810" portrait, 16 K portrait, * 1,500 sheets, 100 sets : B5, A4, B4, A3, 8.511, 8.513, 8.514, 8 K, 1117", 1218", 12.617.7" (SRA3)
* With stapling

G.S.M. Stapling Sizes Suitable for Stapling Maximum Number of Stapled Sheets

56 to 220g/m2 A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, B5 portrait, 1117", 8.514", 8.513", 8.511", 8.511" portrait, 810" portrait, 8 K, 16 K portrait, non-standard sizes (Y direction: 210 to 297 mm, X direction: 182 to 432 mm) With staple cartridge for 100 sheets: 2 to 100 sheets* (FX P paper) With staple cartridge for 50 sheets (optional): 2 to 50 sheets (FX P paper)
* Becomes 65 sheets only for paper larger than A4 or 8.511" size.

Stapling Position

Angled stapling and parallel stapling Angled stapling is always possible only for A4 and A3 sheets. Stapling other than A4 and A3 sheets is angled or parallel to the paper edge.

G.S.M. Punching Sizes Suitable for Punching Punching Position G.S.M.

56 to 162g/m2 2 holes: A3, B4, A4, A4 portrait, B5 portrait, 1117", 8.511" portrait 4 holes: A3, A4 portrait, 1117", 8.511" portrait 2 holes, 4 holes 56 to 128g/m2

395

A Specifications

$
Booklet Output Tray Paper Size A3, B4, A4, 1117", 8.514", 8.513", 8.511", 8 K, non-standard sizes Non-standard sizes are as follows: Y direction: 210 to 297 mm, X direction: 279 to 432 mm X and Y are the same sizes. Y is shorter than X. 20 sets 15 sheets (90 g/m2)*
* Becomes 14 sheets when adding covers.

Capacity Maximum Number of Stapled Sheets Stapling Position G.S.M.

Appendix
Interposer (Tray 7) Power Dimensions Weight

Two-stapled 60 to 90 g/m2*
* 220 g/m2 for covers

Paper Size

A3, B4, A4*1, A4 portrait, B5 portrait*2, 1117", 8.514"*3, 8.513"*3, 8.511"*1, 8.511" portrait, 810" portrait*2, 8 K, 16 K portrait
Contact your Customer Support Center in the following cases: *1 When changing A4 to 8.511" paper *2 When changing B5 portrait to 810" paper *3 When changing 8.514" to 8.513"paper

You cannot copied on the paper loaded in tray 7. Capacity G.S.M. 200 sheets (FX P and L paper) 60 to 220 g/m2 From the main body <Staple finisher> (W) 1,045 (D) 725 (H) 1,165 mm <Booklet maker finisher> (W) 1,050 (D) 725 (H) 1,165 mm <Staple finisher> 105 kg or less (including staple cartridge) <Booklet maker finisher> 130 kg or less (including booklet staple cartridge)
The booklet output tray is used for the booklet maker finisher.

396

A Specifications

Folding unit (Z and C) (optional)


Z Fold Paper Size Capacity A3, 1117", B4, 8 K Max.: 30 sheets (A3, 1117", FX P paper) 20 sheets for 8 K and B4 G.S.M. Delivered to Tri-Fold (In/Out) Paper Size Number of Sheets to be Folded Capacity G.S.M. Delivered to Power Dimensions Weight 60 to 90 g/m2 Finisher tray A4, 8.511" 1 sheet 40 sheets (FX P and L paper) 60 to 90 g/m2 Tri-fold output tray 15W/supplied from finisher (W) 200 (D) 725 (H) 1,115 mm 40kg or less

Appendix

Network scanner (TWAIN)


Document Size Resolution Scaling Interface Format Document glass: Max: 297432 mm, Min: no limit DADF: Max: 297432 mm, Min: 148210 mm 600, 400, 300, 200, 100dpi (23.6, 15.7, 11.8, 7.9, 3.9 dots/mm) RGB: 10 bit for input, 8 bit for output 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX <File Format> Black/White/Grayscale/Full Color: Multi-page TIFF, Single page TIFF, PDF, XDW <Data Compression> Black/White: G3MH, Color: JPEG Protocol Driver Operating System TCP/IP TWAIN Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP For details of the latest operating systems supported, visit our website.

397

Possible Combinations of Features


Tray 5 (bypass)

Sharpness Color Control Background Suppress Auto Contrast Map Photo Photo - Photograph Photo - Halftone Text - Pencil Text (Black) Text - Normal Text Text & Photo - Light Text Text & Photo - Photograph Text & Photo - Halfton Lighter/Darker - Lightest/Dar Lighter/Darker - Auto Independent X-Y%_ Auto-Fit_ Variable % R/E Presets_ 100%_ Auto % Other Size Auto *' Postcard 12x18"/SRA3 Label Transparency Heavywt 2 Plain/Heavywt 1 Tray 7 (Separator/Cover) Trays 2-4/Tray 6 - Heavywt 1 Trays 1-4/Tray 6 - Plain Paper Supply - Auto_

Selected Feature (Second selection)

Tray 5 (bypass)

Appendix

Selected Feature (First selection)

Paper Supply - Auto A Trays 1 -4/Tray 6 - Plain Trays 2-4/Tray 6 - Heavywt 1 A A Tray 7 (Separator/Cover) A Plain/Heavywt 1 A Heavywt 2 A Transparency A Label A 12X187SRA3 A Postcard A Auto *' A Other Size E Auto % 100% R/E Presets Variable % E Auto-Fit Independent X-Y% Lighter/Darker - Auto Lighter/Darker - Lightest/Darkest Text & Photo - Halftone Text & Photo - Photgraph Text & Photo - Light Text Text - Normal Text Text - Pencil Text (Black) Photo - Halftone Photo - Photgraph Photo Map Auto Contrast Backgraund Suppress Color Control Sharpness

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A A A S S

A A A A A A A A A

A A A A A A A A A A

A E A A A A A A A A S A A S

S S A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A E E A E E E E E E C E E E E A A A A A A A A

A A A A A

D E E E E

Blank: First second selects can be be combined. 4: 4: Covers (without images), Annotation,Output Orientation, 12: Available when used as a tray. Copies are output facing Covers (without images), Annotation, Output Orientation, Blank: First && second selects can combined. 12: Available when used as a tray. Copies are output facing A: First second selections cannot be be combined. and Stapling/Punching for the entire build job files can be up. up. be A: First && second selections cannot combined. and Stapling/Punching for the entire build job B: Second selection not available. used. 13: Priority printing is possible while printing the build job B: Second selection is is not available. used. 13: Priority printing is possible while printing the build job C: Selections can made but the first selection is is ignored. 5: 5: Can be selected only when a trayis specified and Can be selected only when a tray is specified files.files. In priority printing, you can switch Copy mode to In priority printing, you can switch Copy mode to C: Selections can bebe made but the first selectionignored. D: Selections can made but the second selection is Reduce/Enlarge is is Auto. BuildBuild mode. Job Job mode. D: Selections can bebe made but the second selection is Reduce/Enlarge Auto. ignored. 6: 6: Interrupt copying remains active untilthe status changes 14: A calculation to rotate thethe paper for the specified folding Interrupt copying remains active until the status changes ignored. 14: A calculation to rotate paper for the specified folding is E: First selection will changed to to another selection. to End Job. made. made. E: First selection will bebe changedanother selection. to End Job. is S: When Start button pressed, message will appear to say Set through Build Job. Separators are inserted between S: When Start button is is pressed, message will appear to say 7: 7: Set through Build Job. Separatorsare inserted between 15: Possible onlyonly when images are not attached. 15: Possible when images are not attached. that copying cannot done. segments. 16: Heavy weight paper 2 cannot be be used. that copying cannot bebe done. segments. 16: Heavy weight paper 2 cannot used. U: When selecting a feature, a message is displayed the Stapling can be used if documents have the size in U: When selecting a feature, a message is displayed that that the8: 8: Stapling can be used if documentshave the same size in17: Copies are facing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or 17: Copies are facing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or feature cannot be used with one already selected. thethedirection. Y Y direction. copies are facing down for heavy weight 2 paper. feature cannot be used with thethe one already selected. copies are facing down for heavy weight 2 paper. 1: Cannot enlarge. 9: 9: Covers function is used in each segment. Covers function is used in each segment. 18: Although combinations of features are possible, 1: Cannot enlarge. 18: Although combinations of features are possible, 2: Selection isis based on the first document. 2: Selection based on the first document. 10:10: When tray is is selected, the stapleand punch positions annotations are not not printed. When tray 7 7 selected, the staple and punch positions annotations are printed. 3: There are restrictions in High Document Volume mode, 3: There are restrictions in High Document Volume mode, areare limited according to the orientationof the paper. limited according to the orientation of the 19: When heavy weight paper 1 is is selected with "Folding", 19: When heavy weight paper 1 selected with "Folding", such as the status changes to interrupt copying mode such as the status changes to interrupt copying mode 11:11: You can select the paper size fromtab paper (Heavy the StartStart button cannot pressed. You can select the paper size from tab paper (Heavy the button cannot be be pressed. when End Job is is selected. weight paper 1 2), A4 portrait, or 8.5 x 11" portrait. when End Job selected. weight paper 1 oror 2), A4 portrait,or 8.5 x 11" portrait. -: Not available -: Not available

*1 The feature cannot be used with this machine.

398

B Possible Combinations of Features

Tray 5 (by pas s )

Annotation

Margin Shift - Auto Center

Margin Shift - Corner (Side 1)

Margin Shift - Corner (Side 2)

Mixed Size Original

Original Size_

Original Size - Auto Size Detect

Original Orientation Head to Top

Original Orientation Head to Left

Output - Auto

Output - Collated

Output - Uncollated

2-Sided -1 to 1

2-Sided -1 to 2

2-Sided - 2 to 2

2-Sided - 2 to 1

2-Sided - Original

2-Sided - Copies

Large Output

Sample Set

Multiple Up

Repeat Image

Covers

Transparency Inserters

Tab Copying

Copy to Edge_

Margin Shift - Variable (Side 1)

Margin Shift - Variable (Side 2)

Edge Erase - Binding

Document on Document Glass

Edge Erase - Top & Bottom_

Edge Erase - Left & Right

Document in DADF

S elected F eature (S econd selection)

S elected F eature (F irst selection)

Appendix

P aper S upply - A uto Trays 1 -4/Tray 6 - P lain Trays 2-4/Tray 6 - Heavywt 1 Tray 7 (S eparator/C over) P lain/Heavywt 1 Heavywt 2 Transparency Label 12X 187S RA 3 P ostcard A uto *' Other S ize A uto % 100% R/E P resets V ariable % A uto-F it Independent X -Y% Lighter/D arker - A uto Lighter/D arker - Lightest/D arkest Text & P hoto - Halftone Text & P hoto - P hotgraph Text & P hoto - Light Text Text - Normal Text Text - P encil Text (B lack) P hoto - Halftone P hoto - P hotgraph P hoto Map A uto C ontrast B ackgraund S uppress C olor C ontrol S harpness

B S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

E E E E B B B B B

S S

S S

S S

S S

S S

S S S

S S

S S

E B E B E B B B E 11 E 11 E B E B E B E B E B E 11

Tray 5 (bypass)

B B B

1 1 1 2

B lank : Firs t & s ec ond s elec ts c an be c om bined. 4: Covers (without im ages ), A nnotation, Output Orientation, Blank: First & second selects can be combined. 4: Covers (without images), Annotation, Output Orientation,12: A vailable when us ed as a tray . a tray. Copies are output facing 12: Available when used as Copies are output fac ing A : Firs t & s ec ond s elec tions c annot be c om bined. and S tapling/P unc hing for the entire the entire files c an be A: First & second selections cannot be combined. and Stapling/Punching for build job build job files can be up. up. B : S ec ond s elec tion is not available. us ed. 13: P riority printing is pos s ible while printing the build job B: Second selection is not available. used. 13: Priority printing is possible while printing the build job C: S elec tions c an be m ade but the firs t s elec tion is 5: Can be s elec ted only when a tray is s pec ified and files . In priority printing, y ou c an s witc h Copy m ode to C: Selections can be made but the first selection is ignored. Reduc e/E nlarge is selected only when a tray is specified and 5: Can be A uto. files. ode. ignored. B uild Job m In priority printing, you can switch Copy mode to D: S elec tions c an be m ade but the s ec ond sselectionis Selections can be made but the second elec tion is Reduce/Enlarge is Auto.until the s tatus c hanges Build Job mode. D: 6: Interrupt c opy ing rem ains ac tive 14: A c alc ulation to rotate the paper for the s pec ified folding is ignored. ignored. to E nd 6: Interrupt copying remains active until the status changesm ade. 14: A calculation to rotate the paper for the specified folding Job. E : Firs t s elec tion will be c hanged to another s elec tion. 7: S et through B uild Job. S eparators are ins erted between 15: P os s ible only when im ages are not attac hed. E: First selection will be changed to another selection. to End Job. is made. S : W hen S tart button is pres s ed, m es s age will appear to say s egm ents . Set through Build Job. Separators are inserted between 16: Heavy Possible only 2 c annot be usare not attached. S: When Start button is pressed, message will appear to 7: 15: weight paper when images ed. s ay 8: S taplingsegments.ed if doc um ents have the s am e s iz e in c an be us 17: Copies are fac ing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or that copying cannot be done.

U: When selecting a feature, a message is displayed that the feature cannot be used with the one already selected. 1: Cannot enlarge. 2: Selection is based on the first document. 3: There are restrictions in High Document Volume mode, such as the status changes to interrupt copying mode when End Job is selected.

8: Stapling can be used if documents have the same size in the Y direction. 9: Covers function is used in each segment. 10: When tray 7 is selected, the staple and punch positions are limited according to the orientation of the paper. 11: You can select the paper size from tab paper (Heavy weight paper 1 or 2), A4 portrait, or 8.5 x 11" portrait.

16: Heavy weight paper 2 cannot be used. 17: Copies are facing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or copies are facing down for heavy weight 2 paper. 18: Although combinations of features are possible, annotations are not printed. 19: When heavy weight paper 1 is selected with "Folding", the Start button cannot be pressed. -: Not available

*1 The feature cannot be used with this machine.

399

B Possible Combinations of Features

B uild Job Separators (Build Job) Printed Separators (Segment)

Auto Rotation

Setting in Priority Printing

Stapling - Top Left

Setting in Interrupt Copying

Output Orientation - Auto

Bound Originals - Left then Right/Right then Left

Stapling - Left Double

Stapling - Top Right

Stapling - Right Double

Output Orientation - Face Up

Output Orientation - Face Up (Reverse Order)

Output Orientation - Face Down

Bound Originals - Top then Bottom

Bound Originals - 2 Sided

Bound Originals - 1 Sided

Bi-Foldn~ri-Fold

Stapling - Top Double

Book Duplex

High Document Volume

ZFold

Punching

S elected F eature (S econd selection)

S elected F eature (F irst selection)

Tray 5 (bypass)

Appendix

P aper S upply - A uto Trays 1 -4/Tray 6 - P lain Trays 2-4/Tray 6 - Heavywt 1 Tray 7 (S eparator/C over) P lain/Heavywt 1 Heavywt 2 Transparency Label 12X 187S RA 3 P ostcard A uto *' Other S ize A uto % 100% R/E P resets V ariable % A uto-F it Independent X -Y% Lighter/D arker - A uto Lighter/D arker - Lightest/D arkest Text & P hoto - Halftone Text & P hoto - P hotgraph Text & P hoto - Light Text Text - Normal Text Text - P encil Text (B lack) P hoto - Halftone P hoto - P hotgraph P hoto Map A uto C ontrast B ackgraund S uppress C olor C ontrol S harpness

S S 10 10 10 10 10 10 S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S B S S S S S S S S S S S S

S S S S S S S

B lank : Firs t s ec ond s elec ts c an c om bined. Blank: First & second selects can be combined. A : Firs t & s ec ond s elec tions c annot be c om bined. A: First & second selections cannot be combined. B : S ec ond s elec tion is not available. B: Second selection is not available. C: S elec tions c an be m ade but the firs t s elec tion is ignored. C: Selections can be made but the first selection is ignored. D: S elec tions c an be m ade but the s ec ond s elec tion is D: Selections can be made but the second selection is ignored. ignored. E: First selection will be changed to another selection. S: When Start button is pressed, message will appear to say that copying cannot be done. U: When selecting a feature, a message is displayed that the feature cannot be used with the one already selected. 1: Cannot enlarge. 2: Selection is based on the first document. 3: There are restrictions in High Document Volume mode, such as the status changes to interrupt copying mode when End Job is selected.

im ages ), A nnotation, 4: Covers (without images), Annotation, Output Orientation, and S tapling/P unc hing for the entire build job files c an be and Stapling/Punching for the entire build job files can be us ed. used. 5: Can be s elec ted only when a tray is s pec ified and 5: Can be selected only when a tray is specified and Reduc e/E nlarge is A uto. Reduce/Enlarge is Auto. 6: Interrupt c opy ing rem ains ac tive until the s tatus c hanges 6: Interrupt copying remains active until the status changes to End Job. 7: Set through Build Job. Separators are inserted between segments. 8: Stapling can be used if documents have the same size in the Y direction. 9: Covers function is used in each segment. 10: When tray 7 is selected, the staple and punch positions are limited according to the orientation of the paper. 11: You can select the paper size from tab paper (Heavy weight paper 1 or 2), A4 portrait, or 8.5 x 11" portrait.

A vailable us ed tray . fac ing 12: Available when used as a tray. Copies are output facing up. up. 13: P riority printing is pos s ible while printing the build job 13: Priority printing is possible while printing the build job files . In priority printing, y ou c an s witc h Copy m ode to files. In priority printing, you can switch Copy mode to B uild Job m ode. Build Job mode. 14: A c alc ulation to rotate the paper for the s pec ified folding 14: A calculation to rotate the paper for the specified folding is made. 15: Possible only when images are not attached. 16: Heavy weight paper 2 cannot be used. 17: Copies are facing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or copies are facing down for heavy weight 2 paper. 18: Although combinations of features are possible, annotations are not printed. 19: When heavy weight paper 1 is selected with "Folding", the Start button cannot be pressed. -: Not available

*1 The feature cannot be used with this machine.

400

B Possible Combinations of Features

T ra y 5 (b yp a s s ) Heavywt 2 Postcard Label Plain/Heavywt 1 12x18"/SRA3 Transparency

Paper Supply - Auto

Trays 1-4/Tray 6- Plain

Trays 2-4/Tray 6 - Heavywt 1

Tray 7 (Separator/Cover)

Auto *1

Other Size

Auto%

100%

R/E Presets

Variable %

Auto-Fit

Independent X-Y%

Lighter/Darker - Auto

Lighter/Darker - Lightest Darkest

Text & Photo - Halftone

Text & Photo - Photograph

Text & Photo - Light Text

Text - Normal text

Text - Pencil Text (Black)

Photo - Halftone

Photo - Photograph

Photo

Map

Auto Contrast

Background Suppress

Color Control

Sharpness

S e le c te d F e a tu re (S e c o n d s e le c ti o n )

S e le c te d F e a tu re (S e c o n d s e le c ti o n )

Appendix

A n n o ta ti o n M a rg i n S h i ft - A u to C e n te r M a rg i n S h i ft - C o rn e r (S i d e 1 ) M a rg i n S h i ft - C o rn e r (S i d e 2 ) M a rg i n S h i ft - V a ri a b le (S i d e 1 ) M a rg i n S h i ft - V a ri a b le (S i d e 2 ) E d g e E ra s e - T o p & B o tto m E d g e E ra s e - L e ft & R i g h t E d g e E ra s e - B i n d i n g C o p y to E d g e D o c um e nt in D A D F D o c u m e n t o n D o c u m e n t G la s s M i xe d S i ze O ri g i n a l O ri g i n a l S i ze O ri g i n a l S i ze - A u to S i ze D e te c t O ri g i n a l O ri e n ta ti o n H e a d to T o p O ri g i n a l O ri e n ta ti o n H e a d to L e ft O u tp u t - A u to O u tp u t - C o lla te d O u tp u t - U n c o lla te d 2 -S i d e d - 1 to 1 2 -S i d e d - 1 to 2 2 -S i d e d - 2 to 2 2 -S i d e d - 2 to 1 2 -S i d e d - O ri g i n a l 2 -S i d e d - C o p i e s L a rg e O u tp u t S a m p le S e t M u lti p le U p R e p e a t Im a g e C o ve rs T ra n s p a re n c y In s e rte rs T a b C o p yi n g B o o k le t C re a ti o n S S S S S S S S S S

B S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S

S S

S S

S S

S S S S B E B B

S S

S S S S

S S 1 1 1 2 B

S S E E B S

E E B

E E B 19

B B E B B

B E E 11 11 B

B E B B

B E B B

E B B

E B S

E 11 2
1 2 : 12: Availablehwhens used sas ara y . CCopiesaare o u t p u t fa c in g up.. A va ila b le w e n u e d a a t tray. o p ie s re output facing u p 1 3 : P rio rit y p rin t in g is p o s s ib le w h ile p rin t in g t h e b u ild jo b 13: Priority printing is possible while printing the build job file s . In p rio rit y p rin t in g , y o u c a n s w it c h C o p y m o d e t o files. In priority B u ild J o b m o d e . printing, you can switch Copy mode to 1 4 : A Build u la t io n t o ro t a t e t h e p a p e r fo r t h e s p e c ifie d fo ld in g is c a lc Job mode. m a d e . A calculation to rotate the paper for the specified folding is 14: 1 5 : P o s s ib le o n ly w h e n im a g e s a re n o t a t t a c h e d . made. 1 6 : H e a vy w e ig h t p a p e r 2 c a n n o t b e u s e d . 1 7 : 15: p ie s a re fa c in g u p fo r p la in /are not w e ig h t 1 p a p e r o r C o Possible only when images h e a vy attached.

B la n k F irs t s e c o n selects s c n combined. Blank: :First &&second d s e le c tcanabe b e c o m b in e d . A F irs s ec on A: :First t&&second d s e le c t io ncannot o t b e c o m b in e d . selections s c a n n be combined. B : S e c o n d s e le c t io n is n o t a va ila b le . B: :Second io n s c a n bis not d e b u t t h e firs t s e le c t io n is ig n o re d . C S e le c t selection e m a available. C: :Selections s c a n b e m a dbut u t t hfirst e c o n d s e le c ignored. D S e le c t io n can be made e b the e s selection is t io n is ig n o re d . D: Selections can be made but the second selection is E : F irs t s e le c t io n w ill b e c h a n g e d t o a n o t h e r s e le c t io n . ignored. S : W h e n S t a rt b u t t o n is p re s s e d , m e s s a g e w ill a p p e a r t o s a y E: First c o p y in g c willn be b e d o n e . to another selection. t h a t selection a n o t changed S: When Start button is pressed, message will appear to say that copying cannot be done. U: When selecting a feature, a message is displayed that the feature cannot be used with the one already selected. 1: Cannot enlarge. 2: Selection is based on the first document. 3: There are restrictions in High Document Volume mode, such as the status changes to interrupt copying mode when End Job is selected.

4 C o ve (without images), Annotation, Output p u t O rie n t 4: : Coversrs (w it h o u t im a g e s ), A n n o t a t io n , O u tOrientation,a t io n , a n d S t a p lin g / P u n c h in g fo r t h e e n t ire b u ild jo b file s c a n b e and e d . Stapling/Punching for the entire build job files can be us 5used.n b e s e le c t e d o n ly w h e n a t ra y is s p e c ifie d a n d : Ca R e d u c eselected only when a tray is specified and 5: Can be / E n la rg e is A u t o . 6Reduce/Enlargeyis Auto. a in s a c t ive u n t il t h e s t a t u s c h a n g e s : In t e rru p t c o p in g re m to E n d Jo b . 6: : Interruptro u g h B u remains S e p a ra t o rsthe statusrtchanges e e n copying ild J o b . active until a re in s e e d b e t w 7 S et th to e g m e n t s . s End Job. 7: Set through Build Job. Separators are inserted between segments. 8: Stapling can be used if documents have the same size in the Y direction. 9: Covers function is used in each segment. 10: When tray 7 is selected, the staple and punch positions are limited according to the orientation of the paper. 11: You can select the paper size from tab paper (Heavy weight paper 1 or 2), A4 portrait, or 8.5 x 11" portrait.

16: Heavy weight paper 2 cannot be used. 17: Copies are facing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or copies are facing down for heavy weight 2 paper. 18: Although combinations of features are possible, annotations are not printed. 19: When heavy weight paper 1 is selected with "Folding", the Start button cannot be pressed. -: Not available

*1 The feature cannot be used with this machine.

401

B Possible Combinations of Features

Annotation

Margin Shift - Auto Center

Margin Shift - Corner (Side 1)

Margin Shift - Corner (Side 2)

Margin Shift - Variable (Side 1)

Margin Shift - Variable (Side 2)

Edge Erase - Top & Bottom_

Edge Erase - Left & Right

Edge Erase - Binding

Copy to Edge_

Document in DADF

Document on Document Glass

Mixed Size Original

Original Size_

Original Size - Auto Size Detect

Original Orientation Head to Top

Original Orientation Head to Left

Output - Auto

Output - Collated

Output - Uncollated

2-Sided -1 to 1

2-Sided -1 to 2

2-Sided - 2 to 2

2-Sided - 2 to 1

2-Sided - Original

2-Sided - Copies

Large Output

Sample Set

Multiple Up

Repeat Image

Covers

Selected Feature (Second selection)

Selected Feature (First selection)

Bulid Job

Appendix

Bound Originals - Top then Bottom Bound Originals - Left then Right/Right then Left Bound Originals - 2 Sided Bound Originals - 1 Sided Book Duplex Punching Stapling - Top Left Stapling - Top Right Stapling - Left Double Stapling - Right Double Stapling - Top Double ZFold Bi-Fold/Tri-Fold Setting in Priority Printing Setting in Interrupt Copying High Document Volume Output Orientation - Auto Output Orientation - Face Up Output Orientation - Face Up (Reverse Order) Output Orientation - Face Down Separators (Build Job) Printed Separators (Segment) 4 Setting in Build Job
Blank: First & second selects can be combined. A: First & second selections cannot be combined. B: Second selection is not available. C: Selections can be made but the first selection is ignored. D: Selections can be made but the second selection is ignored. E: First selection will be changed to another selection. S: When Start button is pressed, message will appear to say that copying cannot be done. U: When selecting a feature, a message is displayed that the feature cannot be used with the one already selected. 1: Cannot enlarge. 2: Selection is based on the first document. 3: There are restrictions in High Document Volume mode, such as the status changes to interrupt copying mode when End Job is selected.

S S S S S

B B B B B 8 8 8 8 8

E E

E E

S S S S

S S S S S

B B B B B B

B B B B B

B 15 B 15 B 15 B 15 B 15 B B B B B B B B B B

E E E E E E E

B E E E E E E

B B B

B B B B B 4

4: Covers (without images), Annotation, Output Orientation, and Stapling/Punching for the entire build job files can be used. 5: Can be selected only when a tray is specified and Reduce/Enlarge is Auto. 6: Interrupt copying remains active until the status changes to End Job. 7: Set through Build Job. Separators are inserted between segments. 8: Stapling can be used if documents have the same size in the Y direction. 9: Covers function is used in each segment. 10: When tray 7 is selected, the staple and punch positions are limited according to the orientation of the paper. 11: You can select the paper size from tab paper (Heavy weight paper 1 or 2), A4 portrait, or 8.5 x 11" portrait.

12: Available when used as a tray. Copies are output facing up. 13: Priority printing is possible while printing the build job files. In priority printing, you can switch Copy mode to Build Job mode. 14: A calculation to rotate the paper for the specified folding is made. 15: Possible only when images are not attached. 16: Heavy weight paper 2 cannot be used. 17: Copies are facing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or copies are facing down for heavy weight 2 paper. 18: Although combinations of features are possible, annotations are not printed. 19: When heavy weight paper 1 is selected with "Folding", the Start button cannot be pressed. -: Not available

*1 The feature cannot be used with this machine.

402

B Possible Combinations of Features

Build Job

Auto Rotation

Printed Separators (Segment) Separators (Build Job) Output Orientation - Face Down Output Orientation - Face Up (Reverse Order) Output Orientation - Face Up Output Orientation - Auto High Document Volume Setting in Interrupt Copying Setting in Priority Printing Bi-Foldn~ri-Fold ZFold Stapling - Top Double Stapling - Right Double Stapling - Left Double Stapling - Top Right Stapling - Top Left Punching Book Duplex Bound Originals - 1 Sided Bound Originals - 2 Sided

Bound Originals - Left then Right/Right then Left Bound Originals - Top then Bottom

Selected Feature (Second selection)

Appendix

Selected Feature (First selection)

Annotation Margin Shift - Auto Center Margin Shift - Corner (Side 1) Margin Shift - Corner (Side 2) Margin Shift - Variable (Side 1) Margin Shift - Variable (Side 2) Edge Erase - Top & Bottom Edge Erase - Left & Right Edge Erase - Binding Copy to Edge Document in DADF Document on Document Glass Mixed Size Original Original Size Original Size - Auto Size Detect Original Orientation Head to Top Original Orientation Head to Left Output - Auto Output - Collated Output - Uncollated 2-Sided - 1 to 1 2-Sided - 1 to 2 2-Sided - 2 to 2 2-Sided - 2 to 1 2-Sided - Original 2-Sided - Copies Large Output Sample Set Multiple Up Repeat Image Covers Transparency Inserters Tab Copying Booklet Creation
Blank: First & second selects can be combined. A: First & second selections cannot be combined. B: Second selection is not available. C: Selections can be made but the first selection is ignored. D: Selections can be made but the second selection is ignored. E: First selection will be changed to another selection. S: When Start button is pressed, message will appear to say that copying cannot be done. U: When selecting a feature, a message is displayed that the feature cannot be used with the one already selected. 1: Cannot enlarge. 2: Selection is based on the first document. 3: There are restrictions in High Document Volume mode, such as the status changes to interrupt copying mode when End Job is selected.

S S S S S B B B B B 8 8 8 8 8

E E E E

E E E E E E E E B E E E E E E S B B

S S S S S S S S S S B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 17 17 17 B B B B B B

B B B B B B B B B B B 15 15 15 15 15 B B B B B B B 18 B B

3 B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B 18 S 18 S S B B B B B B B B B

4: Covers (without images), Annotation, Output Orientation, and Stapling/Punching for the entire build job files can be used. 5: Can be selected only when a tray is specified and Reduce/Enlarge is Auto. 6: Interrupt copying remains active until the status changes to End Job. 7: Set through Build Job. Separators are inserted between segments. 8: Stapling can be used if documents have the same size in the Y direction. 9: Covers function is used in each segment. 10: When tray 7 is selected, the staple and punch positions are limited according to the orientation of the paper. 11: You can select the paper size from tab paper (Heavy weight paper 1 or 2), A4 portrait, or 8.5 x 11" portrait.

12: Available when used as a tray. Copies are output facing up. 13: Priority printing is possible while printing the build job files. In priority printing, you can switch Copy mode to Build Job mode. 14: A calculation to rotate the paper for the specified folding is made. 15: Possible only when images are not attached. 16: Heavy weight paper 2 cannot be used. 17: Copies are facing up for plain/heavy weight 1 paper or copies are facing down for heavy weight 2 paper. 18: Although combinations of features are possible, annotations are not printed. 19: W hen heavy weight paper 1 is selected with "Folding", the Start button cannot be pressed. -: Not available

*1 The feature cannot be used with this machine.

403

Originals/Copies Orientation (With Covers)

This section explains the orientation of the documents and copies when copying with covers:
The following table indicates that Normal/HeavyWt-1 is selected for tray 5 (bypass).

&

Appendix

Without stapling
Document setting Copies result *1 Orientation on DADF *2 Original Output orientation *3 orientation *4 Face Up Copy paper setting Tray 7 not selected Tray 5 Tray 7 selected Tray 5 Tay 7

Last

Head to Top

1st page

Head to Left

Copies are output facing up.

Last

Head to Top

Face Down

1st Page

Head to Left

Copies are output facing down.

*1: *2:

Displays the result when front cover is added to copies that have not had the stapling option set. Displays document orientation when using DADF only. When using document glass, set as follows:

Head to Top

Head to Left

*3: *4:

For information on document orientation, refer to 5.14 Specifying Image Orientation. For information on output orientation, refer to 5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down.

404

C Originals/Copies Orientation (With Covers)

With stapling
Document setting Copies result *1 Orientation on DADF *2 Staple
*3

Copy paper setting Tray 7 not selected Tray 5 Tray 7 selected *6 Tray 5 Tray 7

Original Output orientation *4 orientation *5

Appendix

1st Page

Head to Top Top Left


1st Page

Head to Left

&
Face Down

1st Page

Head to Top Top Right


1st Page

Head to Left
Copies are output facing down.

1st Page

Top Head to Left Double


1st Page

Left Head to Top Double


1st Page

Right Head to Top Double

405

C Originals/Copies Orientation (With Covers)

Document setting Copies result *1 Orientation on DADF *2 Staple


*3

Copy paper setting Tray 7 not selected Tray 5 Tray 7 selected *6 Tray 5 Tray 7

Original Output orientation *4 orientation *5

1st Page

Head to Top Top Left

1st Page

&

1st Page

1st Page

1st Page

*1: *2:

1st Page

Appendix

1st Page

Head to Left

Head to Top Face Down Top Right Head to Left Top Double
Copies are output facing Head to Left down.

Left Head to Top Double Right Head to Top Double

Displays the result when front cover is added to copies that have had the stapling option set. Displays document orientation when using DADF only. When using document glass, set as follows:

Head to Top

Head to Left

*3: *4: *5: *6:

For information on stapling setting, refer to 5.5 Stapling. For information on document orientation, refer to 5.14 Specifying Image Orientation. For information on output orientation, refer to 5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down. When Tray 7 is selected together with the staple option, staple positions enclosed in bold rules in the table are not available. This limitation can be changed by a customer engineer. Contact your Customer Support Center for information.

406

Originals/Copies Orientation (With Drilled Paper)


Copy paper setting *5 Orientation on DADF
*2

The following table*1 shows the orientation of documents and copies when copying with drilled paper.

Appendix

Staple

Copies result (resulting image)

Tray 1

Tray 2 to 4

Tray 6 (high capacity)

Output orientation *4

Staples (Left Double) Head to Top

'

Staples (Top Left)

Head to Top

Head to Left Staples (Top Double) With staples


*3

Head to Left

Staples (Left Single)

Head to Left

Head to Top

Staples (Right Single)

Head to Left

Head to Top

407

D Originals/Copies Orientation (With Drilled Paper)

Staple

Copies result (resulting image)

Copy paper setting *5 Orientation on DADF


*2

Tray 1

Tray 2 to 4

Tray 6 (high capacity)

Output orientation *4

No staples No staples

Head to Top

'

Appendix

Head to Left

*1: *2: *3: *4: *5:

This table displays the orientation for A4 size documents and copies. Refer to this table when the output orientation is Auto (Face down). The document loading direction pertains to the DADF. For information on document orientation, refer to "5.14 Specifying Image Orientation". For information on stapling setting, refer to 5.5 Stapling. For information on output orientation, refer to 5.24 Outputting Face Up/Down. If the required setting has been made by a customer engineer, you can load the drilled paper in the same orientation as the output orientation into the tray. Contact your Customer Support Center.

408

Index
Numerics
100% Fine-tune ........................................... 300 1-sided copying ............................................. 78 1-sided documents to 2-sided copies .................... 80 2 Sided ....................................................... 78 2 Up ........................................................ 141 2-sided copying ............................................. 80 2-sided documents to 2-sided copies .................... 82 4 Up ........................................................ 141 8 Up ........................................................ 141 Build Job ...................................................182 Build Job button .............................................14

C
C (Clear) button ..................................... 13, 287 Cancelling Auto Start .......................................10 Change of Password .....................................296 Changing file name .......................................271 Changing Tools password ...............................306 Checking or changing the address .....................259 Checking Saved Files ....................................269 Checking settings ...........................................57 Checking specified features ...............................57 Checking sum of copies made ..........................387

A
Annotation ................................................. 167 Audio tones ................................................ 295 Auto % (Reduce/Enlarge)

................................. 84

Auto (Large Output) ........................................ 97 Auto (Output) ................................................ 97 Auto (Paper Supply) ........................................ 92 Auto Centre (Margin Shift)............................... 115

................ 131 Auto Size Detect (Original Size) ........................ 119 Auto Start .................................................... 10 Auto Tray Switching (ATS) .............................. 295 Auto-Fit (Reduce/Enlarge)................................. 89 Automatic document size sensing ........................ 44 Automatic image rotation .................................. 50
Auto Contrast (Image Quality Presets)

B
Back Cover Only (Covers) ............................... 155 Background Suppression (Image Quality Presets) ... 131

.................................................. 174 Black/White ................................................ 266 Book Duplex ............................................... 129 Booklet Creation .......................................... 161 Booklet output tray ........................................... 5 Booklet output tray button ................................... 5 Bound document.......................................... 122 Bound Originals ........................................... 122 Breaker switch .......................................... 3, 11 Brightness adjustment dial .............................. 287
Bi-Folded

...................................................372 Clear All button ..............................................13 Collated (Output) ............................................97 Consumables status ......................................373 Copier control panel ...........................2, 286, 287 Copy and Save button .....................................14 Copy button ..................................................14 Copy Job Complete Tone................................295 Copy to Edge (Reduce/Enlarge) ..........................85 Copy to Tab ...............................................171 Copying documents of different settings ...............182 Copying mixed size originals ............................126 Copying on heavy weight paper ..........................72 Copying on postcards ......................................67 Copying on transparencies ................................69 Copying with Date ........................................167 Copying with page numbers .............................167 Copying with Stamp ......................................167 Corner Shift (Margin Shift) ...............................115 Covers ......................................................155
Cleaning

D
De-curl button .................................................5

...................................... 297, 302 Delete File(s) button ......................................274 Delete Job Templates ............................ 177, 180 Deleting file ........................................ 216, 274 Deleting jobs.................................................63
Default value

409

Index

Deleting pages ............................................ 223

GSM ..........................................................25

........................................... 137 Display ....................................................... 14 Document check light ........................................ 3 Document count ............................................ 17 Document cover .............................................. 2 Document glass.............................. 2, 44, 45, 46 Document guide .............................................. 3 Document input tray .......................................... 3 Document jam............................................. 361 Document output tray ........................................ 3 Document size .............................................. 44 Document weight ........................................... 44 Downloading Using FTP ................................. 283 Downloading with a Web browser ...................... 282 Drum cartridge ................................................ 3 Duplex automatic document feeder (DADF) . 44, 45, 48
Density Control

H
Hard Keypad Input Tone ................................. 295

............................................................5 ......................................... 49, 124 Head to Top ......................................... 49, 124 Highly transparent documents (e.g. transparencies) ...45
HCF Head to Left

I
................................... 131 Image Quality/Grad. Adjust .............................. 301 Independent X-Y % (Reduce/Enlarge) ...................89 Input area ....................................................18 Install ....................................................... 277 Interrupt button ..............................................65 Interrupt button/indicator ...................................13 Interrupt copying ............................................65 Interrupt indicator ...........................................65
Image Quality Presets

E
Edge Erase ................................................ 112 Edit/Print Files mode ....................................... 14 Enter/Change Job Name ................................ 177 Error message screen

..................................... 19

J
Job Program Incomplete ................................. 296 Job Status button ...........................................13 Job Status screen

F
Face Down ................................................ 149 Face Down (Output Orientation) ........................ 149 Face Up .................................................... 149 Face Up (Output Orientation) ........................... 149 Fault Tone ................................................. 295 Feature buttons ............................................. 18 Feature Defaults .......................................... 297 Folding ..................................................... 174 Foreign Interface Device................................... 22 Front & Back Covers ..................................... 155 Front Cover Only (Covers) .............................. 155

..........................................62

K
Keypad ...............................................

13, 287

L
Left cover ......................................................3 Left Page Then Right (Bound Originals) ............... 122 Lever ...........................................................3 Lighter/Darker ............................................. 133

..................................................... 2 FTP ......................................................... 282 Full color ................................................... 266 Fuser unit ...................................................... 3
Front door

G
Glossy documents .......................................... 45 Grayscale .................................................. 266

......................... 110 Login name ........................................ 283, 284 Low Power Mode ..................................... 8, 296 Lower left cover ...............................................2 Lower right cover .............................................3
Loading documents in batches

410

Index

M
Machine Ready Tone .................................... 295 Main Control Panel ......................................... 12 Main control panel ....................................

Paper weight ................................................25 Paper, storing and handling ...............................26 Password button ....................................

2, 286 Making two sided copies from a bound document ... 129 Map (Original Type) ...................................... 134 Margin Shift................................................ 115 Maximum capacity .......................................... 44 Maximum Quantity ....................................... 301 Merging files ............................................... 218 Message area ............................................... 17 Meter Check screen ...................................... 387 Mixed Size Originals ..................................... 126 Multiple Up ................................................ 141

N
No Covers ................................................. 155 No Shift (Margin Shift)

................................... 115

13, 287 Passwords ......................................... 283, 284 Pause operation ............................................62 Photo (Original Type) .................................... 134 Photo Reproduction Level ............................... 302 Power Saver...................................................8 Power Saver button ........................................13 Power Saver Off Mode ........................8, 296, 301 Power Saver screen ........................................19 Power switch ..................................................3 Preset % (Reduce/Enlarge) ...............................84 Printing files ............................................... 232 Program Ahead button .....................................60 Programming Ahead .......................................60 Programming copying ......................................60 Punch positions ........................................... 102 Punch scrap container .......................................5 Punching ................................................... 102

No. of copies ................................................ 17 Non-standard size documents ............................ 45

R
R/E Preset 1, 2 ............................................ 299 R/E Presets ................................................ 300 Ratio, specifying your own.................................87 Recall Job Templates ............................

O
Original Orientation .................................

49, 124 Original Size ............................................... 119 Original Size Defaults .................................... 300 Original Type .............................................. 134 Output ........................................................ 97 Output Orientation ........................................ 149 Output sorting ............................................... 97 Output tray..................................................... 5

177, 181 Recommended paper ......................................24 Reduce/Enlarge .............................................84 Repeat Image ............................................. 152 Replacing toner cartridge ................................ 376 Resume operation ..........................................62 Review button ......................................... 13, 57 Right Page Then Left (Bound Originals) ............... 122

P
............................................. 24 Paper jam .................................................. 326 Paper Remaining ........................................... 15 Paper size for punching .................................. 102 Paper sizes for stapling .................................... 99 Paper sizes that can be loaded ........................... 24 Paper stock that can be used ............................. 24 Paper supply ................................................ 92 Paper to use ................................................. 24 Paper tray ................................................... 24 Paper Tray Attributes .................................... 294
Paper Capacity

S
Sample Set ................................................ 185 Save to File button..........................................14 Scan button ..................................................14 Scanning ................................................... 238 Scanning documents ..................................... 264 Screen Layout ............................................. 299 Scroll buttons ................................................18

...........................................17 Separators ................................................. 145 Server ..........................................................2


Selection buttons

411

Index

Set Numbering ............................................ 167 Setting Folder Name ..................................... 205

Top left cover ..................................................5

............... 239 Setting Storage Folders .................................. 194 Setting the mailbox name ............................... 242 Setting the paper type.................................... 294 Sharpness ................................................. 139 Specifications ............................................. 392 Specifying the color gradation .......................... 266 Specifying the density .................................... 266 Specifying the resolution................................. 266 Stamp ...................................................... 167 Stamp (CONFIDENTIAL) ................................ 167 Stamp (Copy Prohibited) ................................ 167 Stamp (Distribution) ...................................... 167 Stamp (IMPORTANT) .................................... 167 Stamp (URGENT) ........................................ 167 Standard specifications .................................. 392 Staple cartridge ............................................... 5 Staple cartridge for booklet .................................. 5 Staple cartridge holder ....................................... 5 Stapling ...................................................... 99 Stapling positions ........................................... 99 Start button .................................................. 13 Stop button .................................................. 13 Store Job Templates ..................................... 177 Stored Job Templates.................................... 177 Switch Mode buttons ....................................... 14 Switching control panel .................................. 286 Switching off power........................................... 7 Switching on power........................................... 6 Switching to System Administrator Mode...... 286, 288 System Admin Mode Exit ................................ 296 System Settings/Meter Check button ............ 13, 287
Setting or Changing Mailbox Password

............ 122 Top right cover ................................................5 Touch panel display ...........................13, 14, 287 Transfer module ..............................................3 Transparency.............................................. 145 Tray 5 (bypass) ...............................................2 Tray 6 (HCF) ..................................................5 Tray 7 ..........................................................5 Tray Preset 1, 2 ........................................... 299 Trays 1, 2, 3, 4 ................................................2 Tri-Fold In .................................................. 174 Tri-Fold Out ................................................ 174 Tri-Fold output tray ...........................................5 Tri-Fold output tray button ...................................5 Tri-Folded .................................................. 174 Troubleshooting ........................................... 322 Types of consumables ................................... 374 Types of documents ...................................... 134
Top Page Then Bottom (Bound Originals)

U
Uncollated (Output) .........................................97 Uninstall (delete) .......................................... 280 URL ......................................................... 282 User Password Entry screen ........................

19, 21

V
Variable % ...................................................88 Variable Shift (Margin Shift) ............................. 115 Volume adjustment dial ....................................13

W
Waste toner bottle ............................................3 Web browser .............................................. 282 White space ............................................... 115

T
Tab .....................................................

16, 17 Tab Copying ............................................... 171 Tab paper .................................................. 171 Text & Photo (Original Type) ............................ 134 Text & Photo Recognition ............................... 301 Text (Original Type) ...................................... 134 Thick documents............................................ 45 Timeouts ................................................... 296 Toner cartridge ................................................ 3 Tools Mode ........................................ 290, 294

Z
Z Fold

...................................................... 105

412

Xerox Corporation Global Knowledge & Language Services 800 Phillips Road - Bldg 845-17S Webster, New York 14580-9791 USA Printed in the USA

July 2003 701P40566

You might also like